ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform User Manual Release 04.10 Edition A Contact Thomson Video Networks Conten
Views 499 Downloads 3 File size 10MB
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform User Manual Release 04.10 Edition A
Contact Thomson Video Networks
Contents
Contents Preface ............................................................ 13 Chapter 1 Overview ......................................................... 19 Product Overview .................................................................. 20 Purpose ....................................................................................... 20 Description.................................................................................. 20 Slot number ........................................................................... 20 MPEG board ........................................................................... 20 Modulator............................................................................... 20 Power Supply......................................................................... 20 Future Proof Contribution Platforms.................................... 21 Main Features ............................................................................. 22 System Applications .................................................................. 24
Product Description ............................................................... 26 Front Panel.................................................................................. 26 Rear Panel ................................................................................... 26 Manager Board ...................................................................... 27 MPEG Board........................................................................... 27 Modulator Board.................................................................... 28
Chapter 2 Installation and startup ................................... 29 Unpacking .............................................................................. 30 Removing the Protective Film .............................................. 31 Installing the Device (Steps) ................................................. 31 Mounting in Rack................................................................... 32 ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform Installation Requirements.... 32 Ventilation................................................................................... 32 Mounting CP6100 Platform(s) in a Rack ................................... 35 Mounting a CP6100 Platform in a 1/2 19’’ Rack................... 35 Mounting one or two CP6100 Platforms in a 19’’ Rack ...... 36 Cabling ........................................................................................ 40 EMC Ground ............................................................................... 40 Power Supply and Protective Ground ...................................... 41 Power Inlet ............................................................................. 41 Power Supply Cord(s) ........................................................... 42
Connecting the Signal Cables............................................... 44 On the Manager Board .............................................................. 44 On each MPEG Board used as Encoder ................................... 46
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
3
Contents
Dual Channels MPEG Board ................................................. Single Channel MPEG Board................................................ On each MPEG board used as Decoder ................................... Dual Channels MPEG Board ................................................. Single Channel MPEG Board................................................ On a Modulator board ...............................................................
46 46 47 47 48 49
Powering Up ......................................................................... 50 Performing the Initial Settings............................................. 51 Accessing the Command Line Interface................................... Entering the Login and Password............................................. Getting Help................................................................................ Setting Initial Parameters .......................................................... Commands to Reboot the Equipment ................................. Commands Relating to IP Parameters ................................. Commands Relating to the Date and Time ......................... Commands Relating to the NTP Server............................... Commands Relating to SysName, SysContact and SysLocation............................................................................ Commands Relating to Community Strings .......................
51 52 53 54 55 55 57 58 60 61
Chapter 3 Chassis Configuration ..................................... 63 Populating the Chassis with MPEG or Modulator Boards. 64
Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation ..................................... 67 Front Panel Description ........................................................ 68 Foreword..................................................................................... 68 Description and overview.......................................................... 68 Setting LCD screen brightness and contrast............................ 70
Screen Description ............................................................... 71 Screen menu tree ....................................................................... 71 Summary of screen functions ................................................... 73 Device booting screen ............................................................... 73 Status screen .............................................................................. 74 Main menu screen...................................................................... 75 Alarms screen............................................................................. 75 Setup screen ............................................................................... 76 IP Setting screen.................................................................... 76 Recall screen .......................................................................... 77 Reboot screen ........................................................................ 79 LCD CAL screen ..................................................................... 79 Info screen .................................................................................. 80 Main Board Information screen.......................................... 80 Temperature Information screen ....................................... 80 Configuration screen.................................................................. 81 Parameters that can be edited from the device front panel 81 4
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Contents
Procedure for changing parameter values .......................... 87
Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface .................................... 89 Reaching the GUI................................................................... 90 Compatible Web Browsers........................................................ 90 Definition of Users ..................................................................... 90 Setting up the link between the PC and the Device ................ 91
Screen Layout ........................................................................ 93 Panels .......................................................................................... 93 Customizing Configuration Tab Layout.................................... 94 Status Bar.................................................................................... 95 Information............................................................................. 95 Login Name and Password................................................... 96 Monitoring Panel........................................................................ 98 Purpose................................................................................... 98 Main Window......................................................................... 98 Configuration Panel ................................................................. 102 Management Tab................................................................. 102 Statistics Tab........................................................................ 103 Ip Counters Tab.................................................................... 111 Automation Tab ................................................................... 113 Configuration Tabs .............................................................. 115 Alarms Panel............................................................................. 118 Purpose................................................................................. 118 Main Window....................................................................... 118
Basic Settings....................................................................... 121 Foreword................................................................................... 121 Creating a New Configuration................................................. 121 Setting an MPEG Encoder ....................................................... 123 Creating the Encoder Branch.............................................. 123 Selecting the Slot................................................................. 125 Selecting the Source ........................................................... 125 Creating the Compressed Video Component.................... 126 Setting the MPEG Program (DVB Service) ........................ 128 Creating the Compressed Audio Component(s) - Dual Channels MPEG board ......................................................................... 129 Creating the Compressed Audio Component(s) - Single Channel MPEG board ......................................................................... 132 Setting the Transport Stream ............................................. 136 Encapsulating TS over ASI ................................................. 138 Encapsulating TS over IP .................................................... 139 Linking TS to Modulator ..................................................... 141 Linking TS to MPTS ............................................................. 142 Setting the Ethernet Interface............................................. 142 Setting an MPEG Decoder ....................................................... 145 Creating the Decoder Branch.............................................. 145 Selecting the Slot................................................................. 146 Selecting the ASI Input Interface........................................ 147
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
5
Contents
Selecting the Ethernet Input Interface ............................... 147 Selecting the IP Rx Stream ................................................. 149 Setting the Service Configuration...................................... 151 Setting the SDI Output Interface ........................................ 153 Setting the Audio Output Interface (Single Channel MPEG board) 154 Setting a Modulator ................................................................. 156 Creating the Modulator Branch .......................................... 156 Selecting the Slot ................................................................ 157 Selecting the TS Source...................................................... 157 Creating ASI Output Monitoring ........................................ 158 Setting Modulation.............................................................. 159 Setting the RF Output.......................................................... 160 Applying or Sending the Configuration to the Equipment... 161
Advanced Settings.............................................................. 162 Advanced Settings, MPEG Encoder........................................ Creating an Ancillary Component...................................... Creating a VBI Component ................................................. Creating an SCTE 35 Component....................................... Creating an MPTS across MPEG Encoder Boards ............ Adding an External Component to a service .................... Setting Automatic Encoding configuration ....................... Advanced settings, MPEG Decoder ........................................ Setting TS Redundancy ...................................................... Creating ASI to IP and IP to ASI Gateways ............................ Setting an ASI to IP Gateway, MPEG Encoder .................. Setting an IP to ASI Gateway, MPEG Decoder.................. Setting Scrambling / Descrambling........................................ Setting Automation.................................................................. Principle................................................................................ Creating a Schedule ............................................................ Schedule Example...............................................................
162 162 164 166 168 171 175 189 189 194 194 197 200 202 202 203 205
GUI Description................................................................... 206 Dialog Boxes Related to MPEG Encoder ................................ Slot x - Dual-Encoder Dialog Box ....................................... SDI Input Dialog Box ........................................................... Video Encoder Dialog Box .................................................. Audio Inputs Dialog Box ..................................................... Audio Encoder Dialog Box.................................................. Ancillary Encoder Dialog Box ............................................. VBI Encoder Dialog Box ...................................................... Output Service Dialog Box ................................................. Transport Stream Dialog Box............................................. ASI Output Dialog Box ........................................................ IP Tx Dialog Box .................................................................. LAN x Dialog Box ................................................................ Dialog Boxes Related to MPEG Decoder................................ Slot x - Dual-Decoder Dialog Box....................................... ASI INPUT Dialog Box......................................................... LAN x Dialog Box ................................................................ IP Rx Dialog Box .................................................................. Input Service Dialog Box .................................................... 6
206 206 207 209 215 217 221 223 225 226 228 229 232 234 234 235 235 236 238
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Contents
SDI Output: Pair x Dialog Box............................................. 242 Audio Outputs Dialog Box .................................................. 245 Dialog Boxes Related to the Modulator ................................. 246 Slot x - Modulator Dialog Box ............................................ 246 TS Selection Dialog Box...................................................... 247 ASI Monitoring Dialog Box ................................................. 247 Modulation Dialog Box ....................................................... 248 RF Output Dialog Box.......................................................... 250 Dialog Boxes Related to LAN 1 / LAN 2 ports on the Manager board (CP6000) .................................................................................... 253 LAN 1 (Agg 1) LAN 2 (Agg 2) Dialog Box .......................... 254
Chapter 6 Servicing ....................................................... 255 Ordering and Installing Software Options......................... 256 Introduction .............................................................................. 256 Accessing the Command Line Interface................................. 256 Entering the Login and Password........................................... 256 Ordering / Installing software options.................................... 256 Ordering software options process.................................... 256 Installing software options process ................................... 257 Displaying Software Options (lsopt) .................................. 257 Displaying the Equipment Code (eqcod) ........................... 258 Uninstalling a Software Option (rmopt) ............................ 258 Installing a Software Option (insopt) ................................. 259 Recovering Lost Keys .......................................................... 259
Displaying Unit information ............................................... 260 Displaying Field Replaceable Unit information (frudisp)...... 260
Installing or Replacing an LCD Front Panel (CP6000) ....... 261 Replacing a MPEG Board .................................................... 262 Replacing a Modulator Board............................................. 264 Cleaning the Air Inlet Grill................................................... 265
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ............................................ 267 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) .................................... 268 Troubleshooting Procedure ................................................ 269 Generating the Report ............................................................. 269 Getting the Report From the Equipment................................ 270
Chapter 8 Tools ............................................................. 271 Equipment Setup Tool ........................................................ 272 Introduction .............................................................................. 272 Description................................................................................ 272 ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
7
Contents
Overview .............................................................................. 272 Description of the Graphical User Interface ...................... 273 PC Setup ................................................................................... 276 Operation .................................................................................. 276 Launching Equipment Setup .............................................. 277 Entering the User Name and Password ............................ 277 Managing ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform in the Equipment Area................................................................... 279 Managing ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform in the Download Area .................................................................... 285 Getting Information in the Messages Area ....................... 288
Download application ........................................................ 289 Overview ................................................................................... Operation .................................................................................. Installing and running the application ............................... Screen description............................................................... Download procedure........................................................... Other application commands ............................................. Status messages.................................................................. Error messages....................................................................
289 290 290 292 293 297 298 299
SigEditor Tool ..................................................................... 300 Overview ................................................................................... 300 Operation .................................................................................. 300
Appendix A Technical Specifications ............................... 305 General Device Specifications ........................................... 306 Electrical Specifications ........................................................... Power supply - ViBE CP6000 .............................................. Power supply - ViBE CP6100 .............................................. Power Consumption............................................................ Mechanical Features ................................................................ Dimensions .......................................................................... Weight .................................................................................. Miscellaneous ...................................................................... Ventilation................................................................................. Reliability .................................................................................. CP6000 / CP6100 Boot phase duration ...................................
306 306 309 310 311 311 314 314 315 316 316
Chassis Specifications ........................................................ 317 CP6000 Chassis ........................................................................ 317 CP6100 Chassis ........................................................................ 317
Manager Board Specifications .......................................... 318 Processing ................................................................................ Interfaces .................................................................................. TS over IP and Control Command on Same Port ............. License management...............................................................
318 319 323 324
MPEG Encoder Specifications ........................................... 327 Encoder Block Diagram ........................................................... 327 Dual Channels MPEG Encoder Board ................................ 327 8
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Contents
Single Channel MPEG Encoder Board ............................... 328 Interface Specifications............................................................ 329 MPEG system layer .................................................................. 338 Video Processing...................................................................... 339 Input video encoding formats ............................................ 339 Horizontal Picture Rescaling ............................................... 339 Picture Filtering.................................................................... 339 Video processing ................................................................. 340 Audio processing ..................................................................... 343 VBI/ANC processing ................................................................. 346 VBI processing (SD Format)................................................ 346 ANC processing (SD and HD Format) ................................ 347 Automatic Encoding configuration......................................... 348 SDI input redundancy .............................................................. 349 Scrambling................................................................................ 350 ASI Input for external components......................................... 351 ASI to IP Gateway..................................................................... 352 Multiplexing Across Boards .................................................... 353 SCTE 104 to SCTE 35 ............................................................... 354 Contribution & Distribution Over Unmanaged Networks..... 355 Overview .............................................................................. 355 Licensing ............................................................................ 356 Maximum operational performances ................................ 356 Max FEC overhead & FEC block settings........................... 357
MPEG Decoder Specifications ............................................ 359 Decoder Block Diagram ........................................................... 359 Dual Channels MPEG Decoder Board ................................ 359 Single Channel MPEG Decoder Board............................... 360 Interface Specifications............................................................ 361 TS Processing ........................................................................... 367 Video Processing...................................................................... 368 Video Rescaling ........................................................................ 368 HD to SD down-conversion ................................................ 370 Audio Processing ..................................................................... 372 VBI/ANC Processing ................................................................. 373 VBI/ANC Processing in Video Rescaling mode ................. 374 TS Redundancy ........................................................................ 375 Descrambling............................................................................ 376 IP to ASI Gateway..................................................................... 376 Contribution & Distribution Over UnManaged Networks..... 377
DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications ....................... 378 Modulator Block Diagram........................................................ 378 Interface Specifications............................................................ 379 Miscellaneous Specifications .................................................. 381 DVB-S Specifications ............................................................... 383 DVB-DSNG Specifications ....................................................... 383 DVB-S2 / DVB-S2X Specifications........................................... 384 Signaling ................................................................................... 384 Diplexer Specifications ............................................................ 385
Standard Compliance.......................................................... 386 Certifications and Environmental Specifications .............. 388 Ordering Guide .................................................................... 392 ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
9
Contents
Base Systems ........................................................................... Hardware Options .................................................................... MPEG Board......................................................................... Modulator Board ................................................................. CP6000 Front Panel ............................................................. CP6100 Adaptation Kit ........................................................ Audio Cable.......................................................................... AC Mains Cables.................................................................. Software Options ..................................................................... Product Release ................................................................... Encoder ................................................................................ Decoder ................................................................................ Modulator............................................................................. Bundles .....................................................................................
393 394 394 394 394 395 395 395 395 395 396 398 399 400
Appendix ............................................................................. 402 Audio Breakout Cable .............................................................. 402 Video Profiles & Bitrates recommendations.......................... 403
Appendix B Safety Instructions ....................................... 405 Safety Summary (English) ................................................ Sicherheit - Überblick (Deutsch) ....................................... Consignes de sécurité (Français) ...................................... Safety Instructions for Finland, Norway, Sweden ..........
406 410 415 420
Appendix C Regulatory Notices ....................................... 421 Appendix D Customer Services ........................................ 423 Support Center Contacts .................................................... Warranty .............................................................................. Services ............................................................................... Spare Parts .......................................................................... Returning Equipment ......................................................... Repackaging for Shipment ................................................ Long Term Product Support .............................................. Recycling the Product.........................................................
10
424 425 426 426 426 426 427 428
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Contents
Appendix E Alarms ........................................................... 429
Glossary ........................................................ 431
Index ............................................................. 447
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
11
Contents
12
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Preface — Standard Documentation Set
Preface Standard Documentation Set The standard ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 documentation set consists of:
a User Manual
a Quick Start Guide
a V04.10 Release Note
The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 User Manual contains background information about the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms, and describes operating procedures. This manual can be used while learning about ViBE CP6000 / CP6100, and for enhancing your basic knowledge of the product. The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Quick Start Guide contains information about installing and configuring the equipment. The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 V04.10 Release Note describes the # Release features. It presents the new features and gives the new commercial codifications, fixed issues, known issues, Interoperability and limitations.
Software version This manual covers the functionality of the software version 04.10 and higher of the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms. This manual continues to be relevant to subsequent software versions where the functionality of the equipment has not changed. When a new software version changes the functionality of the product, a new version of this manual is provided.
About this Manual This manual is written for Operators of the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms. This manual should be kept in a safe place for reference for the life time of the equipment. If passing the equipment to a third party, please ensure to pass all relevant documentation including this manual.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
13
Preface — About this Manual
The manual is organized into the following chapters and appendixes:
Chapter 1 ’Overview’ gives a general description of the equipment and its main features.
Chapter 2 ’Installation and setup’ provides the procedures required for device installation and initial configuration and describes how to connect the device to other devices in your system.
Chapter 3 ’Chassis Configuration’ gives the rules to be observed for populating the chassis with MPEG boards.
Chapter 4 ’Front Panel Operation’ describes how to use the Front Panel of the equipment.
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ details how to use the Web Browser Graphical User Interface to configure the equipment.
Chapter 6 ’Servicing’ describes how to install software options via the Command Line Interface and gives some recommendations for cleaning the air inlet grill.
Chapter 7 ’Troubleshooting’ describes the procedure to follow when you face any problem with the equipment. The procedure consists of generating a “Reportfile.bin” file and sending it to Thomson Video Networks Customer Service. This file is critical to provide efficient support.
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ describes the Equipment Setup tool and the Download application delivered in the CD-ROM with the product. They are used to download new product packages to one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms. The SigEditor tool used to edit SI/PSI tables is also described in this chapter.
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ gives specifications of the device, specifications of the board configured as either an MPEG encoder, MPEG decoder or Modulator, Device compliance and an Ordering guide to order the device and its options.
Appendix B ’Safety Instructions’ gives instructions related to risk of fire, electric shock or injury to persons. This important section is available in English, German and French versions.
Appendix C ’Regulatory Notices’ provides device compliances regarding FCC emission control, Canadian EMC compliance, EN55022 Class A recommendations, VCCI Class A recommendations and Laser compliance.
Appendix D ’Customer Services’ indicates what you should do if you have a problem with equipment, whether you need to repair it, to return it or to dispose of it.
Appendix E ’Alarms’ gives the list of alarms which may be visible in the Alarm panel. For each alarm the diagnostics, action to be performed and alarm severity are given.
A glossary can be found at the end of the manual just prior the Index.
14
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Preface — Conventions Used in This Manual
Conventions Used in This Manual Warnings, Cautions and Notes Heed Warnings All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. The manufacturer cannot be held responsible for injuries or damages where warnings and cautions have been ignored or taken lightly.
Read Instructions All the safety and operating instructions should be read before this product is operated.
Follow Instructions All operating and use instructions should be followed.
Terms in this Manual Safety-related statements appear in this manual in the following form:
Warning statements identify conditions or practices that may result in personal injury or loss of life.
Caution statements identify conditions or practices that may result in damage to equipment or other property, or which may cause equipment crucial to your business environment to become temporarily non-operational.
Notes provides supplementary information. They are highlighted for emphasis, as in this example, and are placed immediately after the relevant text.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
15
Preface — Documentation Feedback
Formatting Naming conventions for the interface elements and Windows elements in this manual follow the Microsoft Manual of Style, Third Edition. Naming conventions for MPEG-2, ATSC, and DVB structures follow the conventions derived from the standards documents listed in Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’. In addition, the following formatting conventions apply to this manual:
Pale blue text refers to specific interface elements that you are instructed to select, click, press or clear. Example: “Select Settings from the Configuration menu”.
Blue text refers to document names, sections, figures or tables. Example: “Refer to section ’Warnings, Cautions and Notes’ on page 13 for more information”.
Mono-spaced text can indicate the following:
Text you enter from a keyboard Example: “Enter administrator administrator for your password”.
for
your
login
and
Paths to components on your hard drive Example: “The MIB is at the following location: C:\MIB”.
Documentation Feedback We are taking great care of our publications. Please help us to improve them by sending your feedback with the reference of the manual at the email address: Email: [email protected]
Important notice Thomson Video Networks reserves the right to make corrections, modifications, enhancements, improvements and other changes to its products or services at any time and to discontinue any product or service without notice.
16
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Preface — Copyrights
Copyrights © Copyright 2015 Thomson Video Networks. All rights reserved.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
17
Preface — Copyrights
BLANK PAGE
18
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
1 Overview Chapter
Introduction This chapter gives a general description of the equipment and its main features.
Content of this Chapter ’Product Overview’......................................................................page 20 ’Product Description’...................................................................page 26
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
19
Chapter 1 ’Overview’ — Product Overview
Product Overview Purpose ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms are the ideal codec solution for very high-quality SD or HD transmission over telecommunications links. A Platform can transport up to 8 (CP6000) or 4 (CP6100) SD/HD channels across ASI or IP Gigabit Ethernet, in any kind of MPEG format from MPEG-2 SD 4:2:0 8 bit up to MPEG-4 HD 4:2:2 10 bit format.
Description Slot number ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms are modular chassis which offer:
CP6000: 4 slots in a 1RU 19" device
CP6100: 2 slots in a 1RU ½ 19" width device.
Each slot can be fitted with a hot swappable board. This solution allows boards to be exchanged without disturbing the channels in use. It is a key feature for easy setup, system expansion and maintenance.
MPEG board Each slot can be fitted with a MPEG board. There are 2 types of MPEG board:
The Dual channels MPEG board: It supports one or two MPEG encoding channels or one or two MPEG decoding channels.
The Single channel MPEG board: It supports one MPEG encoding channel or one MPEG decoding channel with audio interface.
Board configuration (encoder or decoder) and the supported MPEG format are enabled by a software license. A single product and board for the encoder and decoder function simplifies parts management and training and minimizes investments.
Modulator The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms can be fitted with a DVB-S/S2/S2X/DSNG Modulator plugged into one of the slots.
Power Supply The ViBE CP6000 Platform can be fitted with a single AC or DC power supply or dual AC/AC, AC/DC or DC/DC power supply. In the latter 20
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 1 ’Overview’ — Product Overview
case, should the primary power supply fail, operations automatically continue using the backup supply. The ViBE CP6100 Platform is fitted with a single AC power supply.
Future Proof Contribution Platforms ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform architecture is based on μATCA telecom standard with high backplane throughput to address future applications. It is 3Gbps SDI application (1080p50/59.97) ready.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
21
Chapter 1 ’Overview’ — Product Overview
Main Features
CP6000: 1RU 19’’ device with four hot swappable boards
CP6100: 1RU ½ 19’’ width device with 2 hot swappable boards
Single board for encoder or decoder enabled by software license
Automatic SD, HD detection and configuration according to the input video format for encoder application
Video rescaling for decoder application
Dual SDI input per encoder with automatic redundancy
MPEG encoder & decoder board:
Video processing - MPEG-2 SD/HD, 4:2:0 & 4:2:2, 8 bits resolution - MPEG-4 SD/HD, 4:2:0 & 4:2:2, 8 or 10 bits resolution - 2 x MPEG encoders or decoders per Dual channels MPEG board (up to 8 HD in 1RU) or 1 x MPEG encoder or decoder per Single channel MPEG board (up to 4 HD in 1RU).
Audio processing - Audio source - Dual channels MPEG board: SDI signal. - Single channel MPEG board: SDI signal and Audio External interfaces (Analog or Digital) - Up to 8 stereo (2.0) or 2 surround (5.1) audios per video channel - MPEG-1 Layer II (2.0) - AAC-LC (2.0, 5.1)(optional) - HE-AAC (2.0, 5.1), HE-AAC v2 (2.0) (optional) - Dolby® Digital (AC3) (2.0, 5.1) (optional) - Audio Pass-thru: Dolby E, Dolby® Digital (AC3) (2.0, 5.1), MPEG-1 Layer II (1.0, 2.0), AAC-LC (2.0, 5.1), HE-AAC (2.0, 5.1), HE-AAC v2 (2.0)
22
SD/HD Ancillary Processing
VBI Processing
Standard delay and low delay modes
Two Gigabit Ethernet ports per board
BISS mode 1, BISS E Scrambling / Descrambling (optional)
1080p50/59.94 (3Gbps SDI) hardware ready on Dual Channels board only
Forward Error Correction (FEC) for transmission reliability
ASI to IP / IP to ASI Gateway ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 1 ’Overview’ — Product Overview
Modulator board
DVB-S / DVB-S2 / DVB-S2X / DVB-DSNG modulation
2 modulator types: IF or RF output
Contribution & Distribution over un-managed networks protection (optional)
Genlock for decoder application (CP6000 only)
Single or dual power supply (CP6000 only)
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
23
Chapter 1 ’Overview’ — Product Overview
System Applications ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms are perfectly suited to
Contribution (backhaul) circuits from occasional venues such as sport arenas.
Links from Playout Centers to Regions and Affiliates.
Figure 1-1. System applications for ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms
24
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 1 ’Overview’ — Product Overview
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms support point-to-point connection or any-to-any connection. Figure 1-2. Example of point-to-point connection
Figure 1-3. Example of any-to-any connection
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
25
Chapter 1 ’Overview’ — Product Description
Product Description Front Panel The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 front panels feature an LCD screen, a 7-key keypad and a set of three status LEDs. The features of the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 front panels are described in the Front Panel Operation chapter of this User Manual. Figure 1-4. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform front panel
CP6000 front panel
CP6100 front panel
Rear Panel The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 rear panels feature:
26
ViBE CP6000
one or two power supply inlets
a Manager board
up to 4 boards
ViBE CP6100
one power supply inlet
Interfaces of the internal Manager board
up to 2 boards
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 1 ’Overview’ — Product Description
Figure 1-5. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 rear panels
CP6000 1st version rear panel
1 or 2 PSU inlets
Manager board
4 independent slots for hot swappable boards
CP6000 2nd version rear panel LAN 1
MPEG
IO1
IO2
IO3
IO4
IO5
MPEG
IO1
IO2
IO3
IO4
IO5
LAN 2
LAN 1
LAN 1
Audio
MPEG LAN 2
IO1
IO2
IO5
IO1
IO2
IO5
PSU2
GPIO
N
PSU1
N
STAT LAN 1
Audio
LAN 2
LAN 2
LAN 1
LAN 2
SYNC
C&C
TER MPEG
4 independent slots for hot swappable boards
Manager board
1 or 2 PSU inlets
CP6100 rear panel
2 independent slots for hot swappable boards
Interfaces of the Manager board 1 PSU inlet
Manager Board The Manager board provides
Configuration, Monitoring and Diagnostics
Storage of configuration, log and firmware files
Storage of alarms in a database
Automatic detection of board plug in
Uploading of board specific code containing the board management resource and application
Aggregation and distribution of IP datagrams (CP6000 only)
Refer to section ’Manager Board Specifications’ on page 318 for more information on this board.
MPEG Board
There are 2 types of MPEG board:
The dual channels MPEG board: It supports up to two MPEG encoding channels or up to two MPEG decoding channels, whatever it is MPEG2/4 SD/HD 4:2:0 or 4:2:2.
The single channel MPEG board: It supports one MPEG encoding channel or one MPEG decoding channel, whatever it is MPEG2/4 SD/HD 4:2:0 or 4:2:2.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
27
Chapter 1 ’Overview’ — Product Description
The board configuration (encoder or decoder) and the supported formats (video & audio) are enabled by software license.
The MPEG board is hot swappable.
Refer to section ’MPEG Encoder Specifications’ on page 327 for more information when the MPEG board is configured as a dual/single encoder. Refer to section ’MPEG Decoder Specifications’ on page 359 for more information when the MPEG board is configured as a dual/single decoder.
Modulator Board The Modulator board supports DVB-S, DVB-S2, DVB-S2X and DVB-DSNG standards.
There are 2 types of Modulator:
IF - Band Modulator (from 50 MHz to 180 MHz)
L- Band Modulator (from 950 MHz to 2150 MHz)
The Modulator board is hot swappable.
Refer to section ’DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications’ on page 378 for more information.
28
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
2 Installation and startup Chapter
Please read and follow the important safety information in section ’Safety Instructions’ on page 405, noting especially those instructions related to risk of fire, electric shock or injury to persons.
Introduction This chapter provides the procedures required for device installation and initial configuration and describes how to connect the device to other devices in your system.
Content of this Chapter ’Unpacking’...................................................................................page 30 ’Removing the Protective Film’ .................................................page 31 ’Installing the Device (Steps)’....................................................page 31 ’Mounting in Rack’.......................................................................page 32 ’Powering Up’...............................................................................page 50 ’Performing the Initial Settings’ ................................................page 51
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
29
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Unpacking
Unpacking Table 2-1 lists the accessories that are always shipped with your device. Use this list to ensure that your order is complete. More accessories can be delivered depending on options you chose. Table 2-1. List of accessories delivered with the device
Quantity
30
Description
1
ViBE CP6000 or ViBE CP6100 Platform
1
CD-ROM
x
Power cables if ordered
1
Quick Start Guide
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Removing the Protective Film
Removing the Protective Film Remove the protective film from both sides before installation.
Installing the Device (Steps) The following steps are required for device installation and initial configuration: 1. Mounting the device in a rack. 2. Connecting the device to the other devices. 3. Powering the device. 4. Entering the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface (IP, Date/Time). IP address can also be set via the device front panel.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
31
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Mounting in Rack
Mounting in Rack Rack mounting is not mandatory for ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms but the ventilation and safety requirements given in this section must be observed in all cases.
CP6000 Platform The chassis must not be fixed with its rack mounting ears only. If you intend to install it in a rack, L-profiles are required. CP6100 Platform The chassis must not be fixed with its rack mounting ears only. If you intend to install 1 CP6100 in a 1/2 19’’ rack, L-profiles are required. If you intend to install 1 or 2 CP6100 in a 19’’ rack, the platform(s) must be placed on a support (plate or other device).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform Installation Requirements This section lists the principles to be observed and steps to be taken when installing ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms in a rack.
CP6000 Platform CP6000 is supplied as standard with ears for mounting in a 19’’ rack. CP6100 Platform CP6100 is supplied as standard with ears and screws for mounting in a 1/2 19’’. Refer to section ’Mounting CP6100 Platform(s) in a Rack’ on page 35. An optional kit is available to mount 1 or 2 CP6100 Platforms in a 19’’ rack. Refer to section ’Mounting one or two CP6100 Platforms in a 19’’ Rack’ on page 36.
Restrictions must be observed:
related to ventilation (see section ’Ventilation’ on page 32)
related to the cables (see section ’Cabling’ on page 40)
related to the EMC ground (see section ’EMC Ground’ on page 40)
related to the Power supply and protective ground (see section ’Power Supply and Protective Ground’ on page 41)
Ventilation The air flow through the equipment is critical for maintaining the proper temperature range. The following precautions should therefore be observed:
32
Air circulating in the equipment: ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Mounting in Rack
CP6000: As air circulates from right to left in the device (as seen from front), allow at least 50 mm free air space on either side of the device.
CP6100: As air circulates from front to rear in the device, allow at least 50 mm free air space at the front and rear of the device.
Figure 2-1. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 - Cooling air flow
Air in
Air out
CP6000
Air out
Air in CP6100
Prevent hot air from one device flowing into other devices.
Ensure adequate distribution of air flows to the device intakes.
Avoid the effects of natural convection between devices.
Avoid hot/cold air short-circuits.
Avoid transverse effects in coupled racks.
Prevent hot air from accumulating in the rack.
Cover empty slots with blank panels so as not to interfere with chassis ventilation.
Check the air flows: the rack should ensure a sufficient supply of cold air and sufficient evacuation of hot air (according to the number of devices mounted in the rack and their corresponding air flows).
The following important requirements should be followed in addition to the general recommendations:
The device must be installed in a room with low dust levels. The maximum density of dust in the air must not exceed 100μg/m3 and the maximum number of particles with a diameter greater than 1μm must not exceed 1 million/m3. To prevent the power supply from overheating, remember to regularly clean the rack filter according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and clean ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform air inlet grills (at least twice a year).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
33
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Mounting in Rack
Air circulating in the equipment:
CP6000: There must be enough room for a column of cold air to circulate on the right of the chassis, from the bottom to the top of the rack and a column of hot air to circulate on the left of the chassis, from the bottom to the top of the rack.
CP6100: There must be enough room for a column of cold air to circulate at the front of the chassis, from the bottom to the top of the rack and a column of hot air to circulate at the rear of the chassis, from the bottom to the top of the rack.
Cut the L-profiles so as they do not exceed 4 mm in height in the areas facing ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform air inlets and outlets. This will prevent any hot air from accumulating in the device.
Figure 2-2. L-profiles
Cut the L-profiles so as they do not exceed 4 mm in height in the areas facing ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform air inlets and outlets.
CP6000 / CP6100 Platform stacking Given its exact 1RU height, a Platform can be placed on top of another Platform of the same type without any L-profiles or support. However, platforms should be stacked in groups of two, with each group separated from another by a space of 1RU. The total number of Platforms in a rack must be limited to 10.
Failure to observe these installation requirements will directly result in a deterioration in performance, reliability and service life of equipment.
34
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Mounting in Rack
Mounting CP6100 Platform(s) in a Rack The CP6100 Platform is shipped with:
2 x small identical ears for mounting one CP6100 in a 1/2 19’’ rack (refer to section ’Mounting a CP6100 Platform in a 1/2 19’’ Rack’ on page 35).
6 x M3 Torx screws
6 x 1 mm shims
An optional kit is available to mount 1 or 2 CP6100 Platform(s) in a 19’’ rack (refer to section ’Mounting one or two CP6100 Platforms in a 19’’ Rack’ on page 36).
Mounting a CP6100 Platform in a 1/2 19’’ Rack The chassis must not be fixed with its rack mounting ears only, L-profiles are required.
The horizontal center-to-center distance between the rack mounts should be from 241 mm to 247 mm. The shims should be mounted between the ears and the chassis to compensate for any difference in center-to-center distance.
Procedure:
Fix the right ear on the chassis with 3 M3 Torx screws (refer to Figure 2-3).
Fix the left ear on the chassis in the same way.
Mount the chassis in the rack.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
35
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Mounting in Rack
Figure 2-3. 1 CP6100 with ears - Mounting in a 1/2 19’’ rack
if necessary one or more shims
3 M3 screws 241 t o
247m m
shim
Mounting one or two CP6100 Platforms in a 19’’ Rack The chassis must not be fixed with its rack mounting ears only. They must be placed on a support (plate or other device).
An optional kit is available to mount 1 or 2 CP6100 Platform(s) in a 19’’ rack. Kit option reference: CP6100-MEC-KIT-A Kit contents: - 2 x large identical ears - 1 mount plate - 6 M3 Torx screws
Mounting one CP6100 Platform in a 19’’ Rack Procedure:
36
Assemble the large ears on the chassis following the procedure shown in Figure 2-3 (3 M3 Torx screws on either side).
Mount the chassis in the rack.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Mounting in Rack
Figure 2-4. 1 CP6100 with large ears - Mounting in a 19’’ rack
Mounting two CP6100 Platform in a 19’’ Rack Procedure:
Assemble a small ear on the left side of the left chassis (3 M3 Torx screws).
Fix the mount plate on the right side of the left chassis (6 M3 Torx screws).
Figure 2-5. Left CP6100 with ear and mount plate - Mounting of 2 CP6100 in a 19’’ rack
Ear
6 M3 screws
Mount plate
Assemble a small ear on the right side of the chassis positioned on the right (3 M3 Torx screws).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
37
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Mounting in Rack
Figure 2-6. Right CP6100 with ear - Mounting of 2 CP6100 in a 19’’ rack
Ear
Unscrew the ground strap fixing screw at the rear of the right chassis.
Figure 2-7. Ground strap fixing screw - Mounting of 2 CP6100 in a 19’’ rack
Unscrew the ground screw
Assemble the chassis by sliding the left chassis along the mount plate as shown in the figure below:
Figure 2-8. Assembling the chassis - Mounting of 2 CP6100 in a 19’’ rack
38
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Mounting in Rack
Retighten the screw at the rear of the right chassis. The ground strap is fixed with the screw on the left chassis.
Figure 2-9. Ground strap fixing screw - Mounting of 2 CP6100 in a 19’’ rack
Retighten the screw
Screw to use to fix the ground strap
Mount the chassis in the rack.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
39
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Mounting in Rack
Cabling It is essential to separate the power supply cables from the signal cables. When facing the rear of the rack (as the device is connected via the rear panel), the power supply cables must be guided to the right of the chassis and the signal cables to the left.
EMC Ground The EMC connection is required to ensure ground equipotentiality between the different devices in the technical center (only one connection is required per device). Each chassis features a tapped hole to connect a bonding strip (on the CP6000 left side or CP6100 rear panel). This bonding strip has to be fixed using the M4 screw supplied with the device. The bonding strip must have a 6 mm² cross-section and be shorter than 500 mm. When mounting a chassis in the rack you are advised to observe the following points:
Screw the bonding strip onto the chassis before mounting the chassis in the rack. Then, screw the bonding strip onto the EMC DC bus.
Unscrew the bonding strip from the EMC DC bus before moving the chassis. Then unscrew the bonding strip from the chassis.
The rack EMC DC bus (to which the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform EMC strip is connected) must be connected to the rack ground pin. This pin is also connected to the safety ground.
40
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Mounting in Rack
Power Supply and Protective Ground Power Inlet The power outlet comprises a connector without an On/Off switch.
CP6000 Chassis There are five kinds of power inlet according to the chassis model.
chassis with one AC Power Supply.
chassis with two AC Power Supplies for redundancy.
chassis with one DC Power Supply.
chassis with two DC Power Supplies for redundancy.
chassis with one AC Power Supply and one DC Power Supply for redundancy.
CP6100 Chassis There is one AC Power Supply. Figure 2-10. CP6000 / CP6100 - Chassis models and their associated power supply inlets
CP6000
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
CP6100
41
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Mounting in Rack
Power Supply Cord(s) Cord(s) for AC mains power supply (CP6000 or CP6100) The ViBE CP6100 Platform is always fitted with a single AC power
supply.
Specifications
The AC mains power cords are only shipped with the device if ordered. Otherwise, it is advisable to use mains cables with the following features:
Device end of cable: IEC 60320 C13-compliant connector.
Flexible wire: 3 x 1 mm2 cross-section or 18 AWG, 10 A minimum, 250 V compliant with the applicable standard or rules of the country where the device is installed.
Mains outlet end of cable: plug compliant with the applicable standard or rules of the country where the device is installed.
Connecting AC Mains Power Supply Cord(s) to the Power Supply End
The connection panel should comply with the legislation in force in the country of installation. The connection panel must be positioned in the rack in such a way that the plug and power cord(s) are within easy reach for switching off purposes. For (each) mains inlet, the wiring system must feature overload and earth fault protection and a bipolar cut-off device or a differential circuit breaker. If in doubt, contact a qualified electrician. Connecting AC Mains Power Supply Cord(s) to the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform End
Plug the power cord(s) into the mains inlet.
42
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Mounting in Rack
Cord(s) for DC power supply (CP6000) Specifications
The DC power cord(s) are shipped with the device. The DC power supply cord wires are coloured in accordance with the following codes: Table 2-2. List of accessories delivered with the device
Pin layout
Terminals
Wire colour INTERNATIONAL (Cable Ref. 46131742)
A1: -
Blue
A2: protective earth
Green/Yellow
A3: +
Brown
The earthing standard is DC/I with DC return isolated.
- must be linked to a cut-off device. + must be linked to the protective earth (safety ground) outside the device.
The DC power source must be of SELV type (Secundary Electrical Low Voltage). It must be located in the same building as the device and the entire source circuit must be kept within the building. Connecting DC Power Supply Cord(s) to the Power Supply End
The connection panel should comply with the legislation in force in the country of installation. The connection panel must be positioned in the rack in such a way that the plug and power cords are within easy reach for switching off purposes. The wiring system must feature protection against overcurrents which accepts voltages of 48 VDC + 20% - 15% and supports inrush current when the device is plugged in. If in doubt, contact a qualified electrician. Connecting DC Power Supply Cord(s) to the Platform End
Connect the (two) power cord(s) to the DC power inlet(s).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
43
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Connecting the Signal Cables
Connecting the Signal Cables On the Manager Board Figure 2-11. Manager board LEDs and connectors
CP6000 1st version
CP6100 C&C
TER SYN
PPS
LAN 1
LAN 2
GPIO
CP6000 2nd version GPIO
STAT LAN 1
LAN 2
SYNC
C&C
TER
CP6000 chassis version 1 & 2 offer the same functionalities except the PPS input that is not implemented on the version 2
44
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Connecting the Signal Cables
CP6000 Platform a. Check the LEDs:
Table 2-3. CP6000 1st version Manager board LEDs
LED
Meaning
Green LED on
There is no chassis alarm.
Red LED on
There is at least one critical or major alarm.
Green LED off and Red LED off
The chassis is not powered.
Blue LED on
The chassis is rebooting.
Table 2-4. CP6000 2nd version Manager board LED
LED
Meaning
STAT (status)
Green: There is no chassis alarm. Red: There is at least one critical or major alarm. Orange: The chassis is rebooting.
b. Connect the Ethernet cable for Configuration, Monitoring and Diagnostics to the C&C connector. c. If necessary, connect the IP upstream/downstream equipment to the LAN connector(s) (LAN 1/LAN 2).
CP6100 Platform Connect the Ethernet cable for Configuration, Monitoring and Diagnostics to the C&C connector.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
45
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Connecting the Signal Cables
On each MPEG Board used as Encoder Dual Channels MPEG Board Figure 2-12. Dual channels MPEG Encoder board connectors
1. Connect the main and optionally SDI/SD-SDI/HD upstream pieces of equipment to the SDI In connectors (IO1 for encoding channel 1, IO3 for encoding channel 2). IO2 and IO4 connectors can be used as SDI Input connectors in redundancy mode or as ASI Out connectors. 2. Connect the ASI downstream equipment to the ASI Out connector (IO5) and the IP downstream equipment (e.g. Ethernet switch) to the LAN connector(s) (LAN 1/LAN 2). The IP downstream equipment can also be connected to the LAN connector(s) on the Manager board. The use of the LAN 1/ LAN 2 interfaces of the MPEG Encoder board and the LAN interfaces of the Manager board is exclusive. If the ASI to IP gateway optional feature is used, IO5 is the ASI input. Refer to section ’ASI to IP Gateway’ on page 352.
Single Channel MPEG Board Figure 2-13. Single channel MPEG Encoder board connectors
LAN 1
Audio
MPEG
IO1 Audio inputs
SDI input main
IO2
SDI input backup or ASI output
LAN 2
IO5 ASI input or ASI output
Ethernet 1 output
Ethernet 2 output
1. Connect the main and optionally SDI/SD-SDI/HD upstream pieces of equipment to the SDI In connector (IO1). IO2 connector can be used as SDI Input connector in redundancy mode or as ASI Out connector. 46
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Connecting the Signal Cables
2. If necessary, connect the audio upstream pieces of equipment to the Audio connector. 3. Connect the ASI downstream equipment to the ASI Out connector (IO5) and the IP downstream equipment (e.g. Ethernet switch) to the LAN connector(s) (LAN 1/LAN 2). The IP downstream equipment can also be connected to the LAN connector(s) on the Manager board. The use of the LAN 1/ LAN 2 interfaces of the MPEG Encoder board and the LAN interfaces of the Manager board is exclusive. If the ASI to IP gateway optional feature is used, IO5 is the ASI input. Refer to section ’ASI to IP Gateway’ on page 352.
On each MPEG board used as Decoder Dual Channels MPEG Board Figure 2-14. Dual channels MPEG Decoder board connectors
LAN 1
MPEG
IO1
IO2
SDI output SDI output or ASI input Decoder 1
IO3
SDI output SDI output or ASI input
IO4
LAN 2
IO5
ASI output or ASI input
Ethernet 1 input
Ethernet 2 input
Decoder 2
1. Connect the ASI upstream equipment to a connector configured as ASI In (IO1 or IO3 or IO5) and the IP upstream equipment (e.g. Ethernet switch) to the LAN connector(s) (LAN 1/LAN 2). The IP upstream equipment can also be connected to the LAN connector(s) on the Manager board. The use of the LAN 1/ LAN 2 interfaces of the MPEG Decoder board and the LAN interfaces of the Manager board is exclusive.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
47
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Connecting the Signal Cables
2. Connect the SDI/HD-SDI/SD downstream pieces of equipment (e.g. Production Switcher or intermediate protection Switch) to the SDI Out connectors (IO2 for decoding channel 1, IO4 for decoding channel 2). IO1 and IO3 connectors can be configured as mirrors of IO2 and IO4 connectors or as ASI In connectors. 3. If necessary connect a monitor on IO5 configured as an ASI Out connector (in this case IO5 monitors the MPTS present at the input of the decoder in TS redundancy mode only). If the IP to ASI gateway optional feature is used, IO5 is the ASI output. Refer to section ’IP to ASI Gateway’ on page 376.
Single Channel MPEG Board Figure 2-15. Single channel MPEG Decoder board connectors
Audio
MPEG
IO1 Audio outputs
IO2
SDI output SDI output ASI output or or ASI input ASI input
LAN 1
LAN 2
Ethernet 1 input
Ethernet 2 input
IO5
1. Connect the ASI upstream equipment to a connector configured as ASI In (IO1 or IO5) and the IP upstream equipment (e.g. Ethernet switch) to the LAN connector(s) (LAN 1/LAN 2). The IP upstream equipment can also be connected to the LAN connector(s) on the Manager board. The use of the LAN 1/ LAN 2 interfaces of the MPEG Decoder board and the LAN interfaces of the Manager board is exclusive. 2. If necessary, connect the audio downstream pieces of equipment to the Audio connector. 3. Connect the SDI/HD-SDI/SD downstream pieces of equipment (e.g. Production Switcher or intermediate protection Switch) to the SDI Out connector (IO2). IO1 connector can be configured as mirrors of IO2 or as ASI In connector. 4. If necessary connect a monitor on IO5 configured as an ASI Out connector (in this case IO5 monitors the MPTS present at the input of the decoder in TS redundancy mode only). If the IP to ASI gateway optional feature is used, IO5 is the ASI output. Refer to section ’IP to ASI Gateway’ on page 376.
48
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Connecting the Signal Cables
On a Modulator board Figure 2-16. Modulator board connectors
1. Connect the RF Out connector to the downstream equipment. 2. If necessary connect monitoring equipment to the MON Out connector (in this case MON Out monitors the RF Output with a decreased level of 20dB). 3. If necessary connect monitoring equipment to the ASI Out connector (in this case ASI Out monitors the stream after the internal bitrate adaptation process). 4. If necessary connect a 10 MHz reference source to the REF In connector. The internal 10 MHZ reference is used by default. 5. If necessary connect an external ASI source on the ASI In1 connector. 6. If necessary connect an external ASI source on the ASI In2 connector. Diplexer connexion If a diplexer is used with the L - Band Modulator then connect it as follow: Figure 2-17. Diplexer connexions
High pass (L Band) from RF Out connector Common To Up converter
Low pass (Ref 10 MHz) from REF Out connector
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
49
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Powering Up
Powering Up Check that the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform is not yet connected to the LAN as factory-set IP addresses may cause disturbance on the LAN when the device is switched on (address conflict).
Connect the power cords. The green POWER LED(s) will come on. After a start-up phase, the device will become operational. When the device is switched on, the last stored configuration will be active.
50
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Performing the Initial Settings
Performing the Initial Settings Accessing the Command Line Interface In this section and those that follow, the Command Line Interface will be abbreviated by CLI.
CLI is accessed via an Ethernet link using the C&C connector at the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 rear panel and the PC Telnet application. Figure 2-18. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 rear panel
C&C
CP6000 1st version
CP6000 2nd version LAN 1
MPEG
IO1
IO2
IO3
IO4
IO5
MPEG
IO1
IO2
IO3
IO4
IO5
LAN 2
LAN 1
Audio
MPEG LAN 1
LAN 2
IO1
IO2
IO5
IO1
IO2
IO5
PSU2
GPIO
N
PSU1
N
STAT LAN 1
Audio
LAN 2
LAN 1
LAN 2
LAN 2
SYNC
C&C
TER MPEG
C&C CP6100 RF
ASI
ASI
REF
IN
MON
OUT
OUT
IN1 LAN 1
MPEG
IO1
IO2
IO3
IO4
IO5
IN2 LAN 2
C&C
TER
C&C
The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform IP address, which is required for the first Telnet connection, is given on the Acceptance Test Report shipped with the device. The factory set IP address and Netmask for the Control, Commands and Diagnostics port are 192.168.1.1 and 255.255.255.0
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
51
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Performing the Initial Settings
The IP address will be changed during the installation setup. This will be the new customer set IP address that will be required for the next Telnet connections. IP address can be changed:
via the CLI, see section ’Editing IP Parameters (ipset)’ on page 56 or via the Front Panel, see Chapter 4 ’Front Panel Operation’ on page 67.
As the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform C&C Ethernet interface hosts an autocrossover mechanism, you can use direct or crossed cable connection between the PC and ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform. Set up the Telnet connection between the PC and ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform. Figure 2-19. Telnet connection between the PC and ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
A welcome page will be displayed. Go to section ’Entering the Login and Password’ on page 52 to continue.
Entering the Login and Password The welcome page displayed after connection will request the user login and password. CLI has two predefined user groups: Service group and Operator group.
52
The Service group is for Technicians who are responsible for installation. The Login and password are respectively service and service.
The Operator group is for Users who are in charge of operation. The Login and password are respectively operator and operator.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Performing the Initial Settings
In the current release, you must proceed as follows to log in as service: Log in as operator with operator and operator for login and password. Type user. Answer service and service for login and password. Be aware that CLI is case sensitive (service is correct, Service is not correct) To quit the CLI, type quit.
Figure 2-20. Login and password
Getting Help To get the list of all available CLI commands (related to user rights) type help after the prompt. Two types of help are available: one for service and one for operator. Example: CLI.Operator> help
The CLI provides many commands. Some of these commands are not, however, intended for the device user but reserved for Thomson Video Networks use only. It is therefore important to only use the commands described in this manual so as not to disrupt device operation or jam the device, as this would require assistance from Thomson Video Networks Customer Services.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
53
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Performing the Initial Settings
Setting Initial Parameters The commands used to set the initial parameters are listed below. reboot ........................................................................................... page 55 ipdisp ........................................................................................... page 55 ipset ............................................................................................. page 56 ddate ............................................................................................. page 57 sdate ............................................................................................. page 57 dntp ............................................................................................... page 58 sntp ............................................................................................... page 59 rinfo ............................................................................................. page 60 winfo ............................................................................................. page 60 clist ............................................................................................. page 61 cset ............................................................................................... page 61
54
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Performing the Initial Settings
Commands to Reboot the Equipment The following procedure must be used to reboot the equipment: 1. Type reboot after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER on the keyboard. Figure 2-21. Rebooting the device
2. Type y to confirm twice the reboot (or n if you want to cancel it). Figure 2-22. Rebooting the device
Commands Relating to IP Parameters The following procedure is used to set the IP parameters of the Commands, Monitoring & Diagnostics C&C port located on the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform rear panel.
Displaying IP Parameters (ipdisp) (Login: service or operator) To display the IP address, type ipdisp after the prompt then press ENTER on the keyboard. Figure 2-23. Displaying IP parameters (ipdisp)
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
55
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Performing the Initial Settings
Editing IP Parameters (ipset) (Login: service) To set the IP address, proceed as follows: 1. Type ipset after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER on the keyboard. 2. Type the new IP address, gateway, netmask and MTU values successively or press the ENTER key on the keyboard for each of them if you wish to keep the previous values. Set MTU parameter to the required MTU size (in bytes) if, and only if, your control and command link is carried over a link with reduced MTU, and which not properly handles MTU discovery. Otherwise, set MTU parameter to 0 to use the MTU discovery mechanism. 3. Type y after Do you really want to apply these parameters [Y]/[N(default)]? if you wish to confirm the new values or n if you wish to keep the previous values. Figure 2-24. Editing CMD1 IP parameters (ipset1) - Example.
4. As indicated in the MESSAGE line, you have to reboot the device for the new values to be acknowledged (type reboot after the prompt).
56
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Performing the Initial Settings
Commands Relating to the Date and Time Displaying the Current Date and Time (ddate) (Login: service or operator) To display the current date and time, type ddate after the prompt then press ENTER on the keyboard. The UTC date and time will be displayed. Figure 2-25. Displaying the current date and time (ddate) - Example.
Changing the Date and Time (sdate) (Login: service) To change the date and time, proceed as follows: 1. Type sdate after the CLI.Service prompt. 2. Type the new date and time values in year (YYYY), month (MM), day (DD), hour (hh) and minute (mm) format without spaces after UTC time ? 3. Type y after Apply date&time now? if you wish to confirm the new values or n if you wish to keep the previous values. Figure 2-26. Changing the current date and time (sdate) - Example.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
57
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Performing the Initial Settings
Commands Relating to the NTP Server The purpose of NTP (Network Time Protocol) is to synchronize the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform system clock with the clocks of other devices via a shared network. The NTP service can synchronize two clocks provided that the initial offset between these two clocks is slight. You are advised to manually set the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 system clock as close as possible to the NTP server clock. Several minutes are required to achieve perfect synchronization between the two platforms.
The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 is set to operate as an NTP client. The external NTP server can be backed up so that two NTP server IP addresses can be set through the CLI: the first one for the primary NTP server (server 1), the second one for the backup NTP server (server 2).
Displaying the Current NTP Server IP Addresses (dntp) (Login: service or operator) To display whether the NTP feature is enabled or not and to know the current NTP server IP addresses, type dntp after the prompt then press ENTER on the keyboard. The NTP server IP addresses will be displayed. Figure 2-27. Displaying the NTP mode and the NTP server IP addresses (dntp) - Example:
58
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Performing the Initial Settings
Setting the NTP Server IP Addresses (sntp) (Login: service) To enable or disable the NTP feature and set the NTP server IP addresses, proceed as follows: 1. Type sntp after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER on the keyboard. 2. Type y after NTP Time synchronization [1 = Enable]/[0 = Disable] (x) if you wish to enable the NTP feature, or n if you wish to disable the NTP feature. 3. Type the IP address of the primary NTP server after NTP server 1 IP address (current IP address): if you wish to set a new address or press the ENTER key on the keyboard if you wish to keep the previous value. 4. Type the IP address of the backup NTP server after NTP server 2 IP address (current IP address): if you wish to set a new address or press the ENTER key on the keyboard if you wish to keep the previous value. 5. Type y after Do you really want to apply these parameters [Y]/[N(default)]? if you wish to confirm the new values or n if you wish to keep the previous values. 6. As indicated in the MESSAGE line, you have to reboot the device for the new values to be acknowledged (type reboot after the prompt).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
59
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Performing the Initial Settings
Commands Relating to SysName, SysContact and SysLocation SysName, SysContact and SysLocation can be read and edited when installing the product using the CLI rinfo and winfo commands respectively. These parameters are accessed in the MIB2 system.
Displaying SysName, SysContact and SysLocation (rinfo) (Login: service or operator) To display SysName, SysContact and SysLocation, type rinfo after the prompt then press ENTER on the keyboard. Figure 2-28. Displaying SysName, SysContact and SysLocation (rinfo)
Editing SysName, SysContact and SysLocation (winfo) (Login: service) To set the SysName, SysContact and SysLocation, proceed as follows: 1. Type winfo after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER on the keyboard. 2. Type the new SysName, SysContact and SysLocation strings successively or press the ENTER key on the keyboard for each of them if you wish to keep the previous values (Only characters compliant with ASCII code are accepted). 3. Type y after Do you really want to apply these parameters [Y]/[N(default)]? if you wish to confirm the new values or n if you wish to keep the previous values. 4. As indicated in the MESSAGE line, you have to reboot the device for the new values to be acknowledged (type reboot after the prompt).
60
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Performing the Initial Settings
Commands Relating to Community Strings Displaying Community Strings (clist) (Login: service or operator) To display Community Strings, type clist after the prompt then press ENTER on the keyboard. Figure 2-29. Displaying Community Strings (clist)
The Community Strings are displayed.
Editing Community Strings (cset) (Login: service) To edit the Community Strings, proceed as follows: 1. Type cset after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER on the keyboard. Figure 2-30. Editing Community Strings (cset)
2. Type the Community String or press the ENTER key on the keyboard for each of them if you wish to keep the previous values. 3. Type y after Do you really want to apply these parameters [Y]/[N(default)]? if you wish to confirm the new Community String or n if you wish to keep the previous Community String. As indicated in the MESSAGE line, you have to reboot the device for the new values to be acknowledged (type reboot after the prompt).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
61
Chapter 2 ’Installation and startup’ — Performing the Initial Settings
BLANK PAGE
62
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
3 Chassis Configuration Chapter
Introduction This chapter gives the rules to be observed for populating the chassis with MPEG boards.
Content of this Chapter ’Populating the Chassis with MPEG or Modulator Boards’..page 64
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
63
Chapter 3 ’Chassis Configuration’ — Populating the Chassis with MPEG or Modulator Boards
Populating the Chassis with MPEG or Modulator Boards The following rules must be observed to ensure proper cooling of the boards inside the device.
Modulator board location: In CP6000 Platform the Modulator board must be located in slot 3 In CP6100 Platform the Modulator board must be located in slot 1
Figure 3-1. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms with one board
CP6000 Manager board Depends on the CP6000 version
CP6100
Figure 3-2. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms with two boards
CP6000 Manager board Depends on the CP6000 version
CP6100
Figure 3-3. ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform with three boards
Manager board Depends on the CP6000 version
64
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 3 ’Chassis Configuration’ — Populating the Chassis with MPEG or Modulator Boards
Figure 3-4. ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform with four boards
Manager board Depends on the CP6000 version
In all cases, it is mandatory to cover empty slots with blank panels so as not to interfere with chassis ventilation.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
65
Chapter 3 ’Chassis Configuration’ — Populating the Chassis with MPEG or Modulator Boards
BLANK PAGE
66
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
4 Front Panel Operation Chapter
Introduction This chapter explains how to use the Front Panel to configure the equipment.
In this Chapter ’Front Panel Description’ ............................................................page 68 ’Screen Description’ ....................................................................page 71
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
67
Chapter 4 ’Front Panel Operation’ — Front Panel Description
Front Panel Description Foreword The aim of the front panel is not to replace the Management System but to provide a control/command interface for the main settings. Device operation via its front panel generally involves:
changing basic settings (IP settings, etc.).
displaying device codes and serial numbers.
displaying installed software releases.
displaying raised alarms.
recalling predefined configurations. These configurations are defined via the Web Interface.
setting certain parameters of the active configuration. A configuration cannot be defined via the front panel.
displaying device internal temperature.
rebooting the device.
Description and overview The CP6000 / CP6100 front panel features an LCD screen, a 7-key keypad (Home, ESC, OK (Return) and 4 arrow keys) and a set of three status LEDs. Figure 4-1. ViBE CP6000 / 6100 - Front Panel Running
Alarm
Warning
68
UP
HOME
LEFT ESC
OK
RIGHT
DOWN
Device status LEDs
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 4 ’Front Panel Operation’ — Front Panel Description
They indicate the following: Table 4-1. Device status LED specifications
LED
Color
RUNNING
green
ALARM
red
At least one major alarm has been raised
WARNING
orange
At least one minor alarm has been raised
Description The Device is On
Keypad
The keypad features 7 keys used to display and select a menu or a setting: Table 4-2. Keypad specifications
Key
Function
Move the cursor right
Move the cursor left
Move the cursor up or select a numeric value
Move the cursor down or select a numeric value
OK
Access the main menu, a sub-menu or confirm a setting value
ESC
Go back to the menu above
HOME
Go back to the main menu
LCD screen
The LCD screen features a graphic display. It provides up to 5 lines:
Line 1: menu context
Lines 2, 3, 4 and 5: menu
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
69
Chapter 4 ’Front Panel Operation’ — Front Panel Description
Figure 4-2. LCD menu overview
MENU CONT
MENU
Symbols (or markers) help to locate and/or select displayed items: Table 4-3. Meaning of CP6000 / CP6100 front panel LCD symbols
Symbol
Meaning
Animated symbol in the top right of the status screen indicating that the device is operational.
> xxxx <
Text preselection marker. The selected text can then be confirmed by pressing the OK key on the keypad. Move this marker using one of the 4 arrow keys. These symbols indicate indicate the up/down keys are active and depend on the displayed menu.
Setting LCD screen brightness and contrast For optimum readability of texts displayed on the LCD screen, it may be necessary to adjust the Brightness and Contrast according to the lighting conditions. Refer to section ’LCD CAL screen’ on page 79.
70
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 4 ’Front Panel Operation’ — Screen Description
Screen Description Screen menu tree Figure 4-3. Menu tree of screens displayed on the CP6000 / CP6100 front paneI 1/2
Refer to Figure 4-4 on page 72
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
71
Chapter 4 ’Front Panel Operation’ — Screen Description
Figure 4-4. Menu tree of screens displayed on the CP6000 / CP6100 front paneI 2/2
72
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 4 ’Front Panel Operation’ — Screen Description
Summary of screen functions List summarizing the functions available via the screens: Table 4-4. Functions available via the CP6000 / CP6100 front panel screens
Screen
Function
section ’Device booting screen’ on page 73 Indicates that the device is starting up. section ’Status screen’ on page 74
Indicates the device name and IP address.
section ’Main menu screen’ on page 75
Displays available sub-menus.
section ’Alarms screen’ on page 75
Displays alarms raised on the device.
section ’Setup screen’ on page 76
Displays available sub-menus.
section ’IP Setting screen’ on page 76
Displays and used to edit device IP settings.
section ’Recall screen’ on page 77
Used to recall a predefined configuration.
section ’Reboot screen’ on page 79
Used to reboot the device.
section ’LCD CAL screen’ on page 79
Used to adjust the LCD brightness and contrast.
section ’Info screen’ on page 80
Displays available sub-menus.
section ’ Main Board Information screen’ on page 80
Displays Main board information.
section ’ Temperature Information screen’ on page 80
Displays Temperature information.
section ’Configuration screen’ on page 81
Displays available sub-menus. Used to edit and save certain parameters of the current configuration.
Device booting screen When the device is powered on, after a few seconds the LCD lights up and the following message is displayed during the boot process:
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
73
Chapter 4 ’Front Panel Operation’ — Screen Description
Figure 4-5. Booting screen
ViBE Launching ...
The Status screen will be displayed once the boot process is complete: Figure 4-6. Status screen
ViBE CP6000 STATUS CP6000 XXXXXXXX IP Address: 10.12.54.24
The Status screen is described below.
Status screen Figure 4-7. Status screen
ViBE CP6000 STATUS CP6000 XXXXXXXX IP Address: 10.12.54.24
74
Animated symbol indicating that the device is operational.
CP6000
Indicates the name of the device. This name is assigned via the Management System (Web Browser or MediaFlexSUITE).
IP Address
Indicates the device IP address.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 4 ’Front Panel Operation’ — Screen Description
Main menu screen To display the Main menu screen:
From the Status screen, press the OK key.
From a sub-menu, press the ESC key once or more depending on the sub-menu displayed.
Figure 4-8. Main menu screen MAIN
SETUP
INFO
CONFIG
To select a sub-menu, use the , , and keys and then confirm your choice by pressing the OK key. Available sub-menus: Alarms
Used to display alarms raised on the device.
Setup
Used to: Set device IP settings Recall a predefined configuration Reboot the device Make LCD adjustments (Contrast and Brightness)
Info
Used to get information about device board references, chassis references, serial numbers, release numbers and temperatures.
Config
Used to edit and save certain parameters of the current configuration.
Alarms screen The Alarms screen is used to view alarms raised on the device. To display this screen, go to the Main menu screen, select ALARMS using the arrow keys and press OK.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
75
Chapter 4 ’Front Panel Operation’ — Screen Description
Figure 4-9. Alarms screen ALARMS
Severity
Name
XX/YY
Alarm Wording (first line) Alarm Wording (last line)
Severity
Used to indicate alarm severity. The alarm can be Critical, Major, Minor or Warning.
Name
Used to indicate the name of the function with the alarm(s): MAIN, DEC x or ENC x.
XX/YY
XX indicates the number of the alarm in the YY list, where YY represents the total number of alarms raised.
Alarm Wording
Used to provide the alarm description, which is identical to the description displayed on the Management System.
If necessary, the and keys can be used to display the next or previous alarm. The list of alarms is created when the Alarms screen is selected. To update the list of alarms, you will need to exit the Alarms screen.
Setup screen The Setup screen is used to access the IP Settings, Recall, Reboot and LCD CALibration sub-menus. To display this screen, go to the Main menu screen, select SETUP using the arrow keys and press OK. Figure 4-10. Setup screen SETUP
RECALL
REBOOT
LCD CAL
IP Setting screen The IP Setting screen is used to view and set the Control & Command IP Settings. To display this screen, go to the Setup screen, select IP SETTING using the and keys and press OK. The IP Address, Netmask and Gateway will be displayed:
76
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 4 ’Front Panel Operation’ — Screen Description
Figure 4-11. IP Setting screen IP SETTING : 10.141.127.40
IP Netmask
: 255.255.255.0
IP Gateway
: 10.141.127.49
Example: Procedure for editing the IP Address (the procedure for editing the IP Netmask and IP Gateway values is the same)
Use the and keys to select the Address, Netmask or Gateway setting and press OK. The first digit is blinking.
Use the and keys to select the field to be modified and then use the and keys to adjust the value. Refer to the figure below:
Figure 4-12. IP Address, Settings screen IP Address 0 1 0 1 4 1 . 1 2 7. 0 4 0 0 1 1 1 4 1 . 1 2 7. 0 4 0
Confirm the new value by pressing OK. The Confirm screen will be displayed:
Figure 4-13. IP Address settings, Confirm screen IP Address
:11.141.127.40 Do you Confirm update No=ESC
Yes=OK
Press OK to enable the new IP address or press ESC/HOME to exit this screen.
Consistency between the IP address and Gateway address is checked. The changes will be acknowledged after the device has been rebooted.
Recall screen The Recall screen is used to recall a predefined configuration. Configurations are predefined via the Web Interface. To display the Recall screen, go to the Setup screen, select RECALL using the and keys and press OK.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
77
Chapter 4 ’Front Panel Operation’ — Screen Description
Figure 4-14. Recall screen RECALL
XX/YY
ZZ EQU: -----------------> ZZ EQU: -----------------ZZ EQU: -----------------ZZ EQU: ------------------
XX/YY
XX indicates the number of the currently selected predefined configuration. YY indicates the total number of predefined configurations.
ZZ EQU: ........
ZZ: Used to indicate the ID of the configuration. EQU: Used to indicate the type configuration (EQU = Equipment). -------: Name of the configuration as set on creation.
of
Procedure for recalling a configuration
Select the configuration to be recalled on the Recall screen using the or keys.
Confirm your choice by pressing OK. The Confirm screen will be displayed:
Figure 4-15. Recall, Confirm screen RECALL
Preset ZZ Do you Confirm Recall? No=ESC Yes=OK
Press OK to enable the recall or ESC/HOME to exit this screen. At the end of the operation, if the recall was successful the following screen will be displayed:
Figure 4-16. Recall, recall successful screen RECALL
Preset ZZ Recall Done, Press OK
An error message will be displayed in the event of failure.
78
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 4 ’Front Panel Operation’ — Screen Description
Reboot screen The Reboot screen is used to reboot the device. To display this screen, go to the Setup screen, select REBOOT using the and keys and press OK. Figure 4-17. Reboot screen REBOOT Reboot Equipment? No=ESC Yes=OK
Procedure for rebooting the device
Press OK to reboot the device. If you do not wish to reboot the device, press ESC/HOME to exit this screen.
LCD CAL screen The LCD Calibration screen is used to adjust the LCD Brightness and Contrast. To display this screen, go to the Setup screen, select LCD CAL using the and keys and press OK. Figure 4-18. LCD CAL screen LCD CAL.
CONTRAST
Procedure for adjusting LCD Brightness or Contrast Use the and keys to select the Brightness or Contrast setting and press OK. Figure 4-19. Brightness CAL screen BRIGHTNESS
Adjust Brightness
= Up/Down
Save=OK
Exit=Esc/Home
Use the and keys to adjust the setting according to the lighting conditions.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
79
Chapter 4 ’Front Panel Operation’ — Screen Description
Press OK to confirm and save the setting(s) or ESC/HOME to exit this screen without saving the setting(s). If OK is pressed the new settings will be restored on next device power up, otherwise the previous settings will be recalled.
Info screen The Info screen is used to display the Software Package and Hardware versions of the Main Board. To display this screen, go to the Main menu screen, select Info using the and keys and press OK. Figure 4-20. Info screen INFO
TEMPER.
Main Board Information screen The Main Board Information screen is used to get CPU Board and device information. To display this screen, go to the Info screen, select MAIN using the and keys and press OK.
The following information will be displayed:
Figure 4-21. Main Board Info screen MAIN BOARD INFO Active SW
:CP6000 XX.XXXX
P/N
:XXXXXXXX
S/N
:sn XXXXXXXX
EQCODE
: XXXX
Active SW
Used to indicate the device active Software release number.
P/N
Used to indicate the device reference.
S/N
Used to indicate the device serial number.
EQCODE
Used to indicate the CPU board equipment code. The equipment code is used to order a software option.
Temperature Information screen The Temperature Information screen is used to display the Ambient Temperature. To display this screen, go to the Info screen, select TEMPER. using the and keys and press OK. 80
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 4 ’Front Panel Operation’ — Screen Description
The following information will be displayed:
Figure 4-22. Temperature Info screen TEMPER. BOARD INFO T Ambient
T Ambient
:XX°C / YY°F
Used to indicate the internal device temperature. The temperature is displayed in degrees Centigrade and Fahrenheit.
Configuration screen To display this screen, go to the Main menu screen, select CONFIG using the arrow keys and press OK. The Configuration screen is used to edit certain parameters of the current configuration. Refer to Figure 4-4 ’Menu tree of screens displayed on the CP6000 / CP6100 front paneI 2/2’ on page 72.
Parameters that can be edited from the device front panel Any parameters not provided below have to be edited via the device’s Web Browser interface. The parameters are described in detail in Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
81
Chapter 4 ’Front Panel Operation’ — Screen Description
Parameters that can be edited on an Encoder Figure 4-23. Menu tree of Encoder configuration
Table 4-5. List of parameters that can be edited on an encoder
Functions Input Settings
Parameters SDI ASI (ASI to IP Gateway or External Component input)
Activity (Yes/No)
Audio settings (Single channel board: Audio from board front panel)
82
Analog audio: XLR Input (In1(L1)/In2(R1), (In3(L2)/In4(R2)) Alignment (value) Headroom (value) Digital audio: XLR Input (In1(AES1), In2(AES2), In3(AES3), In4(AES4)) Sample Rate Converter (On/Off)
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 4 ’Front Panel Operation’ — Screen Description
Table 4-5. List of parameters that can be edited on an encoder
Functions Component Settings *
Parameters Video
PID (value) No Source Mod (Black Pattern ....) Input Standard (1280x720p@50Hz, .....) Picture Resolution (1280x720, ....) Encoding Format (H264, ...) Chroma profil (4:2:0 - 8 bits, ....) Picture Format (4:3, ....) Encode Delay (Standard, ....) Auto bitrate (On/Off) Bitrate (value) Entropy coding (CABAC, ....) Automatic GOP size (Yes/No) GOP size (value)
Audio
PID (value) Input Format (PCM, ....) Standard (MPEG1 Layer II, ....) Source (Analog 1, Stereo 1 (Grp1/ Ch1-2, ....) Signaling mode (Stereo, ....) Audio Mode (Stereo, ....) Frame per PES (One audio frame, ....) Bitrate (value) No source mode (Silence, ....) AAC Syntax (Mpeg-2, ....) AAC Encapsulation (ADTS, ....)
Ancillary
PID (value)
External Component Settings *
Input PID (value)
Service Settings *
Service Id (value)
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Output PID (value)
83
Chapter 4 ’Front Panel Operation’ — Screen Description
Table 4-5. List of parameters that can be edited on an encoder
Functions
Parameters
TS Settings *
Bitrate automatic computing (Yes/No) Bitrate (value) If a TS to Modulator is instantiated
ASI Settings
TS (Enabled/Disabled) Modulator Slot number (value) Activity (Yes/No) Output Selection (value)
IP Tx Settings
Destination IP Address (value) Destination UDP Port (value) Tx Encapsulation (MPEG/UDP/IP, ....)
LAN Settings
Enable interface (Yes/No) Port number (value) IP Address (value) Netmask (value) Default Gateway (value)
Gateway Settings
* These parameters can also be edited in an Encoding Profile
84
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 4 ’Front Panel Operation’ — Screen Description
Parameters that can be edited on a Decoder Figure 4-24. Menu tree of decoder configuration
Table 4-6. List of parameters that can be edited on a decoder
Functions
Parameters
ASI Settings
Activity (Yes/No)
LAN Settings
Enable interface (Yes/No) Port number (value) IP Address (value) Netmask (value) Default Gateway (value)
IP Rx Settings
Multicast Address (value) Destination UDP Port (value) Encapsulation (MPEG/UDP/IP, ....)
Service Settings
Service Selection Mode By Id (only if By PID or By Service name has been previously selected via the Web Browser). Selection modes By PID or By Service name can not be selected via the front panel. Service Id (value). Service PID or Service name can not be edited via the front panel.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
85
Chapter 4 ’Front Panel Operation’ — Screen Description
Table 4-6. List of parameters that can be edited on a decoder
Functions Output Settings
Parameters SDI
Activity (Yes/No)
ASI (IP to ASI Gateway)
Activity (Yes/No)
Audio settings (Single channel board: Audio to board front panel)
Analog audio: Activity (Yes/No) XLR Output (Out1(L1)/Out2(R1), (Out3(L2)/Out4(R2)) Source (Audio 1 to Audio 8) Level (value) Digital audio: Activity (Yes/No) XLR Input (Out1(AES1), Out2(AES2), Out3(AES3), Out4(AES4)) Source (Audio 1 to Audio 8)
Gateway Settings
Parameters that can be edited on a Modulator Figure 4-25. Menu tree of Modulator configuration
Table 4-7. List of parameters that can be edited on a modulator
Functions
Parameters
TS Selection
TS Selection (Internal, ....)
Modulation Settings
Standard (DVB-S2, ....) ModCod (8PSK 5/6, ....) Symbol Rate (45,000,000 Baud, ....) Roll-Off (0.35, ....)
86
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 4 ’Front Panel Operation’ — Screen Description
Table 4-7. List of parameters that can be edited on a modulator
Functions RF Output Settings
Parameters Activity (Yes/No) Output Level (value) Modulator Frequency (value) Carried Modulated (Yes/No) Stream Input Loss (Yes/No)
Parameters that can be edited in the Aggregation function Figure 4-26. Menu tree of Aggregation function
Table 4-8. List of parameters that can be edited in the Aggregation function
Functions LAN Settings
Parameters Enable interface (Yes/No) IP Address (value) Netmask (value) Default Gateway (value)
Procedure for changing parameter values Please refer to Figure 4-4 ’Menu tree of screens displayed on the CP6000 / CP6100 front paneI 2/2’ on page 72 and the editable parameter tables above: 1. Use the , , , and OK keys to select the parameter and press OK to edit it. 2. Set the parameter value
To change a numeric value: - Select the value to change using the or key until the marker indicates the value to change.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
87
Chapter 4 ’Front Panel Operation’ — Screen Description
- Set the value with the or key. - Press OK to confirm the new value. Figure 4-27. Change a numeric value
VIDEO > Bitrate 20, 000
Kbit
To change a non-numeric value:
Figure 4-28. Change a non-numeric value
VIDEO > End to End delay Low Delay
- Set the value with the or key. - Press OK to confirm the new value. 3. Press HOME (once) or ESC (several times) to display the confirmation screen. Figure 4-29. Confirmation screen XXXXXXXX Apply the configuration? No=ESC
Yes=OK
Press OK to apply the new value(s) to the current configuration or ESC/HOME to exit this screen without saving the new value(s). Consistency between the values is checked.
88
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
5 Web Browser Interface Chapter
Introduction This chapter explains how to use the Web Browser Graphical User Interface to configure the equipment.
Content of this Chapter ’Reaching the GUI’.......................................................................page 90 ’Screen Layout’ ............................................................................page 93 ’Basic Settings’.............................................................................page 121 ’Advanced Settings’.....................................................................page 162 ’GUI Description’ .........................................................................page 206
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
89
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Reaching the GUI
Reaching the GUI Compatible Web Browsers The Web Interface has been tested with a Web Browser installed on a Windows system. You can run the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform GUI provided you observe the following requirements for your personal computer:
Web Browser must be Internet Explorer 7.0 (or higher), Mozilla Firefox 3.0 (or higher) or Google Chrome.
Java must be enabled.
Java Runtime Environment 7 update 51 is recommended.
Definition of Users To operate the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 via a Web Browser connected to its Web Interface, 2 User logins are set on device shipment. They have the following names, passwords and profiles: Table 5-1. Users set on device shipment
User login
Passworda
Profile
admin
admin
administrator
operator
No password
operator
a
To change the User name or edit the password, refer to section ’Login Name and Password’ on page 96.
The different profiles provide the following rights: Table 5-2. User profiles and corresponding rights
90
administrator
operator
Product Monitoring
X
X
Alarm Monitoring
X
X
View Entire Configuration
X
X
Configuration Management
X
Reboot Menu
X
Password Change
X
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Reaching the GUI
. Multiple administrator sessions can be active. The administrator session during which the last configuration change occurred has precedence.
Setting up the link between the PC and the Device To set up the link between the operating PC and ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Web Interface and reach the GUI: 1. Connect the PC Ethernet link to the C&C connector on the device rear panel, or to the network connected to this connector. 2. Enter the equipment IP address in the address bar. Figure 5-1. Reaching the GUI
The Graphical User Interface (GUI) Java applet is launched. Following connection, the Web Interface Login page will be displayed:
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
91
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Reaching the GUI
Figure 5-2. Login page
3. Select your Login Name and enter your Password if admin name is selected. See section ’Definition of Users’ on page 90. Check Saving connection settings if you wish your Login Name and Password to be saved on the current PC. Default Users are set on device shipment (e.g. Login Name = admin and Password = admin).
The Monitoring, Configuration and Alarm panels are displayed. See section ’Panels’ on page 93.
92
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
Screen Layout Panels When the applet is launched, three panels are automatically displayed on the screen:
the Monitoring panel
the Configuration panel
the Alarm panel
They will be described in detail later in this section. Figure 5-3. The Monitoring panel, Configuration panel and Alarm panel
Configuration panel Monitoring panel
Alarm panel
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
93
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
Customizing Configuration Tab Layout By default, each tab is displayed as shown in Figure 5-3 on page 93. You can choose either to keep such a layout, to display several tabs at a time, or to display a single tab at a time. To display several tabs at a time: 1. Click a tab’s name and hold the mouse button down. 2. Drag and drop the tab to where you want to display it in the view. A white-outlined rectangle will appear to show you the new possible position. An example is shown in the following figure. Figure 5-4. Possible tabs’ layout
1. Click the tab and hold down the mouse
2. Drag the tab
3. Drop the tab
New tabs’ layout
94
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
The tab is then moved to its new position. In our example, the tab is displayed under the previous tab in the list of configurations. You can modify the order of tabs in the list of configurations by dragging & dropping them from a position to another.
To move the tab back to its original position, proceed the same way: click the tab’s name and hold the mouse button, and then drag and drop the tab next to the other tabs in the list of configurations. To display a single tab in the whole view, double-click the tab. Double-click it again to display your previous tabs’ layout.
Status Bar Figure 5-5. The status bar
Information The status bar gives the following information:
CPU gives a graphical indication of the CPU load (usage ratio).
Status gives the general status of the device internal processing.
if there are one or more critical alarms
if there is no error and one or more major alarms
if there is no error and no alarm
Name of the user connected and name and IP address of the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform.
Date and Time give the local time and date.
Time zone gives the time zone which can be the equipment time zone, the Local time zone, or a GMT time zone.
About displays software and hardware information about the equipment:
Part number
Serial number
Version number
Options
MIBs (click on a MIB to save it)
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
95
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
Figure 5-6. About page
Login Name and Password The status bar can be used to change your Login Name (admin or operator) and edit the admin password.
To change your Login name:
1. Click
,the Login page will be displayed:
Figure 5-7. Login page
2. Select your new Login Name and enter the Password if admin Login name is selected.
96
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
To edit the admin password (current Login Name must be admin):
1. Click
,the Password edit page will be displayed:
Figure 5-8. Password edit page
2. Enter the Old password (current password). Enter the New Password. Confirm the New Password. 3. Click Change.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
97
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
Monitoring Panel Purpose The Monitoring panel lets you see all content received by the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform in real time. Its content is periodically refreshed.
Main Window Figure 5-9. Monitoring panel
Aggregation ports: CP6000 only
Slot 3 and Slot 4: CP6000 only
The following information is displayed:
Aggregation (CP6000 only): Ethernet IP address information and Ethernet link speed.
Depending on the slot content:
For an MPEG Encoder - SDI input level: Video standard and audio format. - Ethernet port level: IP address and link speed. - ASI Out level: TS connected to the port and TS bitrate.
98
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
For an MPEG Decoder - Ethernet port level: Port IP address, port link speed, TS connected to the port, TS destination address and VLAN Id value (if VLAN tagging is enabled). - ASI In level: TS connected to the input. - TS level: SI/PSI table information (PAT, CAT, SDT). - Service level: Name, ID, PMT PID, PCR PID. - Component level: Type and PID.
For an MPEG RF Modulator - ASI input with TS bitrate information. - Internal TS input with TS bitrate information. - RF output with frequency information.
Empty
The following icons can be displayed: Table 5-3. Monitoring icons specifications
SLOT Slot 1: Empty
Slot 3: Empty
Slot 1: Active
Slot 3: Active
Slot 1: Disabled
Slot 3: Disabled
Slot 1: Error
Slot 3: Error
Slot 2: Empty
Slot 4: Empty
Slot 2: Active
Slot 4: Active
Slot 2: Disabled
Slot 4: Disabled
Slot 2: Error
Slot 4: Error ASI
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Input ASI enabled
Output ASI enabled
Input ASI enabled unlocked
Output ASI enabled error
Input ASI disabled
Output ASI disabled
99
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
Table 5-3. Monitoring icons specifications
Giga Ethernet Aggregation
Giga Ethernet enabled unlocked
Giga Ethernet enabled
Giga Ethernet disabled RF
Output RF enabled
Output RF disabled
Output RF enabled error SDI Input SDI Active Locked
Input SDI Backup Active Locked
Input SDI Active Unlocked
Input SDI Backup Active Unlocked
Input SDI Inactive
Input SDI Backup Inactive
Input SDI Nominal Active Locked
Input SDI Backup Active Standby
Input SDI Nominal Active Unlocked
Input SDI Backup Active Standby Unlocked
Input SDI Nominal Inactive
Input SDI Backup Inactive
Input SDI Nominal Active Standby
Output SDI
Input SDI Nominal Active Standby Unlocked Input SDI Nominal Inactive TS
100
Input TS enabled
Input TS Backup Active
Input TS disabled
Input TS Backup Standby
Input TS Nominal Active
Output TS enabled
Input TS Nominal Standby
Output TS disabled
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
Table 5-3. Monitoring icons specifications
Service Digital television
Radio
Nvod
Teletext
Mosaic
Data / Private Component
Video
Subtitle
Audio
Data / Private
Teletext Ghost Component Container
Ghost Overlay
PCR support
Warning
Scrambling
Error Scrambling
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Scrambling root
EMM
ECM
Scrambling group
101
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
Configuration Panel Management Tab Purpose The Management tab is used to reboot the chassis or any board (MPEG or Modulator board) or enable LED flashing on any board front panel for identification purposes (which can be very useful for preventing one board being mistaken for another when an operation is required, such as moving a board, for example).
Description Figure 5-10. Management tab
CP6000 only
The Reboot Shelf button reboots the entire chassis. The Reboot Slot x button reboots board # x. The Blink Slot x button enables LED flashing on board # x.
102
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
Statistics Tab Purpose The Statistics tab displays:
Device temperature
Bitrate at the Decoder
Ethernet or ASI inputs (TS level)
TS input (Services level)
Service input (Components level)
Main Window Figure 5-11. Statistics tab
Chart sub-panel Monitoring panel
Caption sub-panel
Description The Statistics tab consists of 2 sub-panels and a toolbar:
The Chart sub-panel displays the charts.
Figure 5-12. Chart sub-panel
The Caption sub-panel is used to select the content of the displayed charts and indicates the Last value, Minimum value and Maximum value for each parameter during the display time.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
103
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
Figure 5-13. Caption sub-panel
The toolbar is used to configure the charts.
Figure 5-14. Toolbar
Toolbar description
Click
to display the chart settings box.
The available settings are as follows: Figure 5-15. Settings for line charts
104
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
Table 5-4. Available settings
First parameter Antialiasing
Second parameter -
Value scale color
Values
Time
Display points
Enable/Disable the antialiasing filter for display enhancement. A double-click on this icon opens a Color picker menu allowing the Operator to select the color which will be used in the chart for drawing the lines and displaying the text.
R, G, B
RGB component decimal values for the color.
Display grid
Enable/Disable the value display grid.
Auto vertical size
Enable/Disable the auto vertical size feature. When the box is unchecked, the vertical scale is automatically adjusted (Min. and Max. values are extracted from the data). When the box is unchecked, two fields are added to set the Min. and Max. values manually.
Division count
Adjust the number of value display grid lines.
Display grid
Enable/Disable the time display grid.
Division count
Adjust the number of time display grid lines.
Window duration
Adjust the time scale.
-
Enable/Disable the measurement point display.
Click and click displayed chart.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Definition
in the Confirmation box to reset the
105
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
Figure 5-16. Confirmation box
Click
to display or hide the Caption sub-panel.
Figure 5-17. Chart sub-panel with or without Caption sub-panel
Click
and select the type of chart to display.
is not displayed if Temperature chart is selected.
106
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
Figure 5-18. Type of chart to display
Temperature Chart
Double-click in the Monitoring panel to display the temperature charts. In the Caption sub-panel, select the slot temperature to display: Figure 5-19. Temperature charts
Slot 3 temperature chart
Slot 1 temperature chart
Select the slot temperature to display
The Temperature charts give the chipset temperature per slot. The maximum permitted temperature is 85°C. The product is fully reliable up
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
107
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
to this temperature. A temperature in the 60-85°C range is normal during operation. On the CP6000 Platform, as cold air enters side slots 1 and 2, it is normal that the temperature of these slots is lower than the temperature of slots 3 and 4. It is important to note that there is no ventilation until the temperature has reached about 50°C. This ventilation strategy is designed to minimize noise and maximize product service life. This is also why there is a large temperature difference between slots 1 and 2 and slots 3 and 4. When the ventilation increases the temperature difference between the slots decreases. Decoder/ASI or Ethernet Charts
Double-click ETH x ( ) or ASI IN - IO x ( ) in the Monitoring panel to display the TS bitrate charts. In the caption sub-panel, select the TS charts to display: Figure 5-20. TS bitrate charts
TS bitrate charts
Select TS to display
108
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
Decoder/TS Chart
Double-click TS x( ) in the Monitoring panel to display the components of the TS with their bitrate chart. In the Caption sub-panel, select the component charts to display: Figure 5-21. TS components, bitrate charts
TS components bitrate charts
Select the components of the TS to display
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
109
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
Decoder/Service Chart
Double-click Service ( ) in the Monitoring panel to display the components of the service with their bitrate chart. In the Caption sub-panel, select the component charts to display: Figure 5-22. Service components, bitrate charts
Service components bitrate charts
Select the components of the service to display
110
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
Ip Counters Tab Purpose The IP Counters tab displays the quality of the IP RX streams on the Decoder.
Main Window Figure 5-23. IpCounters tab
Toolbar
Panel Monitoring panel
Description The IP Counters tab consists of 1 panel and a toolbar:
The panel displays the IP counter values slot by slot.
Figure 5-24. Ip Counter panel
Panel description Port
Stream IP@: VLAN)
Active Port(s) on the MPEG Decoder board. One port is displayed per IP Rx: If the same port receives n IP Rx it is displayed n times. (Rx port
Uptime
IP Rx destination address and port. The VLAN Id value is indicated if VLAN tagging is used. Time during which the IP Counter is in operation.
Received Packets
IP
Number of IP packets received during the counter uptime.
Missing Packets
IP
Number of IP packets lost during the counter uptime. The measurement is performed before FEC.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
111
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
Missing Packets FEC
IP after
Number of IP packets lost during the counter uptime. The measurement is performed after FEC. Click
to reset the counters of this IP Rx.
The toolbar is used to configure the slot display (simultaneous or tab by tab display).
Figure 5-25. Slot display configuration
112
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
Automation Tab Purpose The Automation tab is used to define the activation time of configurations stored in the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform memory.
Description Figure 5-26. Automation tab
Schedule
The Select button selects the type of automation. Figure 5-27. Type of automation
No automation: the configurations will be activated manually.
Schedule: the configurations will be activated using a schedule.
When the Schedule type is selected, basic tools are available in the toolbar for schedule editing. Figure 5-28. Basic tools
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
113
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
Table 5-5. Basic tools in the editing toolbar
Display
Definition Insert a new schedule after the current selection. Insert a new schedule before the current selection. Duplicate the current selection. Move up the current selection. Move down the current selection. Remove the current selection. Remove all
Refer to section ’Setting Automation’ on page 202 for further information on automation.
114
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
Configuration Tabs Purpose The Configuration tabs are used to edit one or more configurations for ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform. Once edited, the configurations are sent to the equipment for storage or application.
Description Configurations are listed in tabs. Figure 5-29. The list of configurations Configuration tabs
In the list of configurations, the way the name of the configuration appears in the tab indicates its status. Table 5-6. List of configurations
Display
Type of configuration
Definition
Green mark prior the configuration’s name
Active configuration
Configuration that is currently being used by the equipment.
Configuration’s name written between brackets
New configuration
Configuration that has not been sent to the equipment.
Normal text
Configuration sent to the equipment
Configuration that has been sent to the equipment but is not currently being used.
Color of the tab in a slightly lighter grey than the other tabs
Displayed configuration
Configuration that is currently being displayed in the working area.
Small star next to the configuration’s name
Configuration being edited
Configuration that is currently being modified.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
115
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
The buttons displayed on the configuration toolbar vary according to the actions that you are allowed to perform. Figure 5-30. The Configuration toolbar
List of configurations
Opening / Creating configurations
LAN 1 / LAN 2 of the Manager board settings (CP6000 only) Scrambling shared by the Encoder & Decoder modules
The toolbar buttons are spread out on two lines:
The first line contains buttons dedicated to opening or creating a configuration.
The right part of the second line applies to the configuration that is selected in the list of configurations. Possible actions depend on the configuration status (Active configuration, New configuration, Configuration sent to the equipment, Displayed configuration, Configuration being edited). They are described in the following table:
Table 5-7. Toolbar buttons (right part of the second line)
Click
116
Comments
Open
Open a configuration from a file.
New
Create a new configuration manually.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
Table 5-8. Toolbar buttons (second line)
Click
Comments
Rename
Rename the configuration.
Remove
Remove the configuration from the list of configurations. It is not possible to remove the active configuration.
Send
Send the memory.
Apply
Make the selected configuration active on the equipment. This button is not available if automation is running.
Save
Save the configuration to a file.
Copy
Duplicate the configuration.
Check
Check the configuration’s coherence.
Edit/Unedit
Switch between Edit mode and Read-only mode. When clicking Unedit, all modifications in the configuration that is currently modified are lost.
configuration
to
the
equipment’s
The center part is used to display the Product configuration panel or the settings shared by the Encoder/Decoder modules. Scrambling parameters are shared by the Encoder/Decoder modules. Possible actions are described in the following table:
Table 5-9. Toolbar buttons (center part of the second line)
Click
Comments Display the Configuration panel. Display the Scrambling parameters. These parameters are shared by the Encoder/Decoder modules. Display the LAN 1 / LAN 2 parameters of the Manager board (CP6000 only).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
117
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
Alarms Panel Purpose The Alarm panel displays an active alarms list and a closed alarms list. The list of active alarms shows all alarms that are active at the current time. The list of closed alarms shows all past alarms. Alarms (active and closed) are saved in the flash memory, and are restored when the equipment is rebooted.
Main Window The Alarms panel is composed of two tabs: the Active alarms tab and the Closed alarms tab. To display simultaneously active and closed alarms, drag one tab.
Active Alarms Tab Figure 5-31. Alarms panel - Active alarms tab
The Active alarms tab displays a table filled with the active alarms. This table has 3 columns:
118
The Level column displays icons reporting alarm severity:
: Warning
: Critical alarm
: Major alarm
: Minor alarm
: Information
The Description column gives an alarm description.
The Start column gives the rising alarm time.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
Closed Alarms Tab Figure 5-32. Alarms panel - Closed alarms tab
The closed alarms tab displays a table filled with past alarms. When an alarm disappears, it is moved from the Active alarms tab to the Closed alarms tab. This table has 4 columns:
The Level column displays icons reporting alarm severity:
: Warning
: Critical alarm
: Major alarm
: Minor alarm
: Information
The Description column gives an alarm description.
The Start column gives the rising alarm time.
The End column gives the falling alarm time.
Clear and Save Buttons These buttons are located at the top right of the Alarm panel. The Clear button deletes the content of the closed alarms list. When clicking the Clear button, all the closed alarms are removed from the Closed alarms view. Only a clear display is applied: other users will still be able to see them.
The Save button is used to save the alarms (active and closed) into a text file. When you click the Save button, a dialog box will appear so that you can choose the file name and directory for log saving. Once saved, the log file can be opened and read with any word processor application software.
Resizing the Columns Each column on the alarm tables can be resized. Move your mouse cursor between two header columns. The mouse cursor should change to . Click and drag the column to the desired size, and then release the mouse button.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
119
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Screen Layout
Sorting Alarms by Level, Extent, Description, Start date or End Date The Level, Extent, Description, Start date and End date columns can be sorted. Click the header column once. A white arrow appears in this header. To change the sorting mode, click the header once more. When sorted in increasing order, the arrow is displayed. In decreasing order, the arrow is shown.
120
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Basic Settings Foreword ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms are modular chassis which offer 4 slots in the CP6000 Platform and 2 slots in the CP6100 Platform. Each slot can be fitted with a hot swappable MPEG board or a hot Modulator board. The MPEG board supports one (Single Channel MPEG board) or two (Dual Channels MPEG boards) MPEG encoding channels or one or two MPEG decoding channels. This section contains a step-by-step procedure explaining how to configure:
one MPEG encoding channel (to be done twice for a board configured as a dual encoder)
one MPEG decoding channel (to be done twice for a board configured as a dual decoder)
one Modulator board
Creating a New Configuration 1. Click New in the Configuration panel toolbar to create a new configuration. An empty configuration is added with the name (New configuration): Figure 5-33. Empty configuration
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
121
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
2. Rename the configuration by clicking the Rename button in the toolbar. Figure 5-34. Renaming the configuration
122
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Setting an MPEG Encoder The MPEG Encoder board can host: Dual Channels MPEG board: Two MPEG Encoders. Only one MPEG Encoder configuration is described in this section. The procedure is the same for the second one. Single Channel MPEG board: One MPEG Encoder. It hosts an Audio connector on its front panel. This section describes the Dual Channels MPEG board. Regarding the Single Channel MPEG board, only the differences compared to the Dual Channels MPEG board are indicated.
Creating the Encoder Branch 1. Right-click Sources then select the shortcut command Add Encoder Dual Module (Dual Channels MPEG board) or Add Encoder Single Module (Single Channel MPEG board). Figure 5-35. Adding an MPEG Encoder Module
2. Right-click Slot x - Dual-Encoder then select the shortcut command Add MPEG Encoder Input interface. Figure 5-36. Adding an MPEG Encoder Input interface
A branch is automatically created. It comprises 2 basic elements Slot x MPEG Encoder, SDI Input: Pair x which represent the first part of the first MPEG Encoder. They contain default values. The parameters of each element will be changed in the next steps. Other elements such as Video Encoder, Audio Encoder, Output Service, MPEG Transport Stream, TS over IP, TS over ASI will be added to the branch later on at the Operator’s request as explained in this section.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
123
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Figure 5-37. Encoder default branch
Slot x - MPEG Encoder element
Input interface element
To delete the branch, right-click first the first element Slot x Dual-Encoder then select the shortcut command Delete branch.
To declare the second MPEG Encoder of the same board, right-click first the first element Slot x - Dual-Encoder then select the shortcut command Add MPEG Encoder input Interface to create a second branch.
A second branch is created
124
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Selecting the Slot 1. Double-click the first element Slot x - Dual-Encoder for editing. Figure 5-38. Setting the Slot x - Dual-Encoder element
a. Enter the number of the slot the Encoder is plugged to. b. Enter the Encoder name and select the channel mode. Refer to section ’Slot x - Dual-Encoder Dialog Box’ on page 206 for more details about these parameters. c. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
Selecting the Source 1. Double-click the second element SDI Input for editing. Figure 5-39. Setting the Input interface element
a. Edit the source parameters (Input Pair, Source selector, Input backup mode). Refer to section ’SDI Input Dialog Box’ on page 207 for more details about these parameters. b. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
125
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Creating the Compressed Video Component 1. Right-click the SDI Input: Pair x element then select the shortcut command Add / Video Encoder to add the compressed video component. Figure 5-40. Selecting Add Video Encoder
A Video Encoder element is automatically added. Figure 5-41. Video Encoder element is displayed
2. Double-click Video Encoder element for editing. Figure 5-42. Setting the Video Encoder element
a. Select the Standard parameters (Input Standard, No source mode, ......), the compression standard (Encoding format, Video profile, End to End Delay, ......), and the video bitrate (Bitrate). b. Define some advanced video compression parameters (Entropy coding and P picture period, GOP size when End to End delay is set to Standard delay, .......).
126
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Refer to section ’Video Encoder Dialog Box’ on page 209 for more details about these parameters.
c. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
127
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Setting the MPEG Program (DVB Service) 1. Right-click the Video Encoder element then select the shortcut command Insert into new / Output Service to add the compressed video component to a new service. Figure 5-43. Selecting Insert into new / Output service
The Video Pid 512 and Output Service elements are automatically added. Figure 5-44. Video Pid 512 element and Output service element are displayed
To add the compressed video component to an existing service (if any), select the shortcut command Insert into / (Output service x) then select the appropriate service.
2. Double-click the Video Pid 512 element for editing. Figure 5-45. Setting the Video Pid element
a. Set the PID of the video component (Pid). b. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
128
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
3. Double-click the Output Service element for editing. Figure 5-46. Setting the Output service element
a. Enter the service parameters (Service name, Program number) and the PMT PID (PMT PID). b. Set the Scrambling (Enabled box and Profile selection). Refer to section ’Output Service Dialog Box’ on page 225 for more details about these parameters. c. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
Creating the Compressed Audio Component(s) - Dual Channels MPEG board 1. Right-click the SDI Input element then select the shortcut command Add / Audio Encoder to add a compressed audio component. Figure 5-47. Selecting the shortcut command Add / Audio Encoder
An Audio Encoder element is automatically added. Figure 5-48. Audio Encoder element is displayed
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
129
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Repeat this step as many times as necessary if you want to add more than one audio encoder (up to 8 audio encoders are allowed per encoding channel).
Example of 4 Audio Encoders in a channel
2. Double-click each Audio Encoder element for editing. Figure 5-49. Setting the Audio Encoder element
a. Select the audio input format (Input Format). b. Select the audio source(s) (Audio source), the audio compression standard (Audio Standard), the mono, dual or surround channels mode (Audio mode), the number of frame
130
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
per PES (Frame per PES), the No source mode, the AAC settings (AAC Syntax and AAC Encapsulation) if Audio Standard is set to AAC and the audio delay (Delay). c. Set the bitrate (Bitrate) after compression. Refer to section ’Audio Encoder Dialog Box’ on page 217 for more details about these parameters. d. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings. 3. Right-click the Audio Encoder element then select the shortcut command Insert into / Output Service (x) to add the compressed audio component to the service previously created for the video component. Figure 5-50. Selecting Insert into / Output service (x)
The Audio Pid 4112 element is automatically created with a link to the Output service. Figure 5-51. Audio Pid element with a link to the Output service element is displayed
4. Double-click the Audio Pid 4112 element for editing. Figure 5-52. Setting the Audio Pid element
a. Set the PID of the audio component (Pid). b. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
131
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Creating the Compressed Audio Component(s) - Single Channel MPEG board Audio extracted from SDI signal Refer to section ’Creating the Compressed Audio Component(s) - Dual Channels MPEG board’ on page 129.
Analog/Digital Audio from Audio connector 1. Right-click the Slot x - Single-Encoder element then select the shortcut command Add / Audio Input Interface to add an audio inputs element. Figure 5-53. Selecting the shortcut command Add / Audio Encoder
An Audio Inputs element is automatically added. Figure 5-54. Audio Inputs element is displayed
2. Double-click Audio Inputs element for editing. Figure 5-55. Setting the Audio Inputs element
a. Indicate the type of audio (Digital / Analog) injected on the 4 XLR connectors (In1 to In4). Analog Audio: Indicate the Alignment and the Headroom levels. Digital Audio: Indicate if the Sample Rate Converted is enabled. Refer to section ’Audio Inputs Dialog Box’ on page 215 for more details about these parameters. b. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
132
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
3. Right-click the Audio Inputs element then select the shortcut command Add / Audio Encoder to add a compressed audio component. Figure 5-56. Selecting the shortcut command Add / Audio Encoder
An Audio Encoder element is automatically added. Figure 5-57. Audio Encoder element is displayed
Repeat this step as many times as necessary if you want to add more than one audio encoder (up to 8 audio encoders are allowed per encoding channel).
Example of 2 stereo Audio Encoders in an MPEG Encoder.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
133
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
4. Double-click each Audio Encoder element for editing. Figure 5-58. Setting the Audio Encoder element
a. Select the audio input format (Input Format). b. Select the audio source(s) (Audio source), the audio compression standard (Audio Standard), the mono, dual or surround channels mode (Audio mode), the number of frame per PES (Frame per PES), the No source mode, the AAC settings (AAC Syntax and AAC Encapsulation) if Audio Standard is set to AAC and the audio delay (Delay). c. Set the bitrate (Bitrate) after compression. Refer to section ’Audio Encoder Dialog Box’ on page 217 for more details about these parameters. d. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings. 5. Right-click the Audio Encoder element then select the shortcut command Insert into / Output Service (x) to add the compressed audio component to the service previously created for the video component. Figure 5-59. Selecting Insert into / Output service (x)
The Audio Pid 4112 element is automatically created with a link to the Output service. 134
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Figure 5-60. Audio Pid element with a link to the Output service element is displayed
6. Double-click the Audio Pid 4112 element for editing. Figure 5-61. Setting the Audio Pid element
a. Set the PID of the audio component (Pid). b. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
135
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Setting the Transport Stream 1. Right-click the Output Service element then select the shortcut command Insert into new / MPEG Transport Stream. Figure 5-62. Selecting the shortcut command Insert into new / MPEG Transport Stream
The Transport Stream element is automatically added. Figure 5-63. Transport Stream element is displayed
Dual Channels MPEG board: To add a Service to an existing Transport Stream (if any), select the shortcut command Insert into / Transport Stream (x) then select the appropriate Transport Stream.
136
It is possible to build a Multi-Program TS (MPTS) by adding a service from the other encoder of the same MPEG board.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
2. Double-click the Transport Stream element for editing. Figure 5-64. Setting the Transport Stream element
a. Check the Activity box to enable the Transport stream. b. Set its identification (Original Network Id, Transport stream Id). c. Set the output TS bitrate (Bitrate) or check Automatic TS bitrate computing. d. If necessary, load a NIT file. Refer to section ’Transport Stream Dialog Box’ on page 226 for more details about these parameters. e. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
137
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Encapsulating TS over ASI 1. Right-click the Transport Stream element then select the shortcut command Add / TS over ASI. Figure 5-65. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS over ASI
TS over ASI element is automatically added. Figure 5-66. TS over ASI element is displayed
2. Double-click the TS over ASI element for editing. Figure 5-67. Setting the TS over ASI element
a. Check the Activity box to enable the ASI output. b. Select the ASI Output connector (Output). c. Set the size and mode for the TS packets (Packet Size, Packet Mode). Refer to section ’ASI Output Dialog Box’ on page 228 for more details about these parameters. d. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
138
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Encapsulating TS over IP 1. Right-click the Transport Stream element then select the shortcut command Add / TS over IP. Figure 5-68. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS over IP
IP Tx element is automatically added. Figure 5-69. IP Tx element is displayed
2. Double-click the IP Tx element for editing. Figure 5-70. Setting the IP Tx element
a. Check the Activity box to enable the IP transmission. b. Set the Session connection parameters (Tx Encapsulation, Destination IP address, Destination UDP port and Source UDP port). c. Enable or disable the virtual source IP address (Virtual source @ check box) and set its value if enabled (Virtual source IP @ field). ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
139
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
d. Enable or disable the VLAN tagging (VLAN tagging check box) and select the VLAN Id if enabled (VLAN Id field).Set the other IP parameters (TOS, TTL) and the number of TS packets to encapsulate in IP datagrams (Nber of TP per IP frame). e. Enable or disable TS stuffing (Null packet stuffing check box). f. Set the FEC parameters (FEC Mode). Caution: Null packet stuffing is required for the CP6000 decoder. This box must be left checked.
Refer to section ’IP Tx Dialog Box’ on page 229 for more details about these parameters. g. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
140
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Linking TS to Modulator 1. Right-click the Transport Stream element then select the shortcut command Add / TS to Modulator Figure 5-71. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS to Modulator
The TS to Modulator element is automatically added. Figure 5-72. TS to Modulator element displayed
2. Double-click the TS to Modulator element for editing. Figure 5-73. Setting the TS to Modulator element
a. Select the Modulator slot (Slot number). b. Check Enabled to validate the link between the TS and Modulator. c. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
141
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Linking TS to MPTS 1. Right-click the Transport Stream element then select the shortcut command Add / TS to MPTS Figure 5-74. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS to MPTS
The TS to MPTS element is automatically added. Figure 5-75. TS to MPTS element displayed
2. Double-click the TS to MPTS element for editing. Refer to section ’Creating an MPTS across MPEG Encoder Boards’ on page 168 for more details about these parameters.
Setting the Ethernet Interface 1. Right-click the IP Tx element then select the shortcut command Insert into new / Ethernet output interface. Figure 5-76. Selecting the shortcut command Insert into new / Ethernet output interface
LAN1 element is automatically added. Figure 5-77. LAN1 element is displayed Agg x = Lan x of the Manager board
142
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
2. Double-click the LAN1 element for editing. Figure 5-78. Setting the LAN1 interface element
a. Check the Enable interface box to enable the Ethernet interface. b. Select the Ethernet port (Port Number). 1 and 2 correspond to the LAN 1 and LAN 2 ports of the board. Agg 1 and Agg 2 correspond to the LAN 1 and LAN 2 ports of the Manager board. If Agg 1 or Agg 2 is selected, the parameters below are not displayed. The Ethernet interfaces of the Manager board are set in the Aggregation configuration page. Refer to section ’Dialog Boxes Related to LAN 1 / LAN 2 ports on the Manager board (CP6000)’ on page 253. The use of the LAN 1/ LAN 2 interfaces of the processing board and the LAN interfaces of the Manager board is exclusive.
c. Set the IP interface parameters (IP address, Netmask, Default Gateway). This port and the Control & Command port must be part of different IP subnets, without overlaps. d. Select the interface speed (1Gbps, 100 Mbps Autonegotiation) according to your Ethernet infrastructure.
or
e. Select the interface state when disabled (Interface state when disabled). f. Select the IGMP protocol (IGMP). g. Create up to 4 static routes in the Routes text area. Each route is defined by the following parameters: Destination IP address, Mask, Next hop, Cost.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
143
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Figure 5-79. Adding static routes
The button removes the route from the table
Refer to section ’LAN x Dialog Box’ on page 232 for more details about these parameters. h. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
144
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Setting an MPEG Decoder The MPEG Decoder board can host: Dual Channels MPEG board: Two MPEG Decoders. Only one MPEG Decoder configuration is described in this section. The procedure is the same for the second one. Single Channel MPEG board: One MPEG Decoder. It hosts an Audio connector on its front panel. This section describes the Dual Channels MPEG board. Regarding the Single Channel MPEG board, only the differences compared to the Dual Channels MPEG board are indicated.
Creating the Decoder Branch 1. Right-click Sources then select the shortcut command Add Decoder Dual Module (Dual Channels MPEG board) or Add Decoder Single Module (Single Channel MPEG board). Figure 5-80. Adding an MPEG Decoder Module
1. Right-click Slot x - Dual-Decoder then select the shortcut command Add Ethernet Input interface. Figure 5-81. Adding MPEG Decoder Input interface
A branch is automatically created. It is made of 1 basic element Slot x Dual-Decoder which represents the first part of the MPEG Decoder. It is allocated default values. The parameters of this element will be changed in the next steps. Other elements like ASI Input interface or IP Input Interface, Service configuration, Output Pair will be added to the branch later on at the Operator’s request as explained in this section.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
145
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Figure 5-82. Decoder default branch
Slot x - MPEG Decoder element
Input interface element
To delete the branch, right-click first the first element Slot x Dual-Decoder then select the shortcut command Delete branch.
To declare the second MPEG Decoder of the same board, right-click first the first element Slot x - Dual-Decoder then select the shortcut command Add Ethernet input Interface to create a second branch.
A second branch is created
Selecting the Slot 1. Double-click the first element Slot x - Dual- Decoder for editing. Figure 5-83. Setting the Slot x - Dual- Decoder element
a. Enter the number of the slot the Decoder is plugged to. b. Enter the Decoder name and the channel mode. Refer to section ’Slot x - Dual-Decoder Dialog Box’ on page 234 for more details about these parameters. c. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
146
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Selecting the ASI Input Interface 1. Right-click the Slot x - Dual- Decoder element then select the shortcut command Add / ASI Input Interface if the TS is received on the ASI interface. Figure 5-84. Selecting Add / ASI Input Interface
The ASI Input element is automatically added. Figure 5-85. ASI Input element is displayed
2. Double-click the ASI Input element for editing. Figure 5-86. Setting the ASI Input element
a. Check the Activity box to enable the ASI Input interface. b. Select the ASI source connector (Source selector). Refer to section ’ASI INPUT Dialog Box’ on page 235 for more details about this parameter. c. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
Selecting the Ethernet Input Interface 1. Right-click the Slot x - Dual- Decoder element then select the shortcut command Add / Ethernet Input Interface if the TS is received on the Ethernet interface. Figure 5-87. Selecting Add / Ethernet Input Interface
The LAN 1 element is automatically added. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
147
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Figure 5-88. LAN 1 element is displayed Agg x = Lan x of the Manager board
2. Double-click the LAN 1 element for editing. Figure 5-89. Setting the LAN1 element
a. Check the Enable interface box to enable the Ethernet interface. b. Select the Ethernet port (Port Number). 1 and 2 correspond to the LAN 1 and LAN 2 ports of the board. Agg 1 and Agg 2 correspond to the LAN 1 and LAN 2 ports of the Manager board. If Agg 1 or Agg 2 is selected, the parametres below are not displayed. The Ethernet interfaces of the Manager board are set in the Aggregation configuration page. Refer to section ’Dialog Boxes Related to LAN 1 / LAN 2 ports on the Manager board (CP6000)’ on page 253. The use of the LAN 1/ LAN 2 interfaces of the processing board and the LAN interfaces of the Manager board is exclusive.
c. Set the IP device parameters (IP address, Netmask, Default Gateway). This port and the Control & Command port must be part of different IP subnets, without overlaps. d. Select the interface speed (1Gbps or 100 Mbps Autonegotiation) according to your Ethernet infrastructure.
or
e. Select the interface state when disabled (Interface state when disabled).
148
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
f. Select the IGMP protocol used to join multicast streams (IGMP). g. Create up to 4 static routes In the Route text area. Each route is defined by the following parameters: Destination IP address, Mask, Next hop, Cost. Figure 5-90. Adding static routes
The button removes the route from the table
Refer to section ’LAN x Dialog Box’ on page 235 for more details about these parameters. h. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
Selecting the IP Rx Stream 1. Right-click the LAN x element then select the shortcut command Add / IP Receive if the TS is received on the Ethernet interface. Figure 5-91. Selecting Add / IP Receive
The IP Rx element is automatically added. Figure 5-92. IP Rx Interface element is displayed
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
149
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
2. Double-click the IP Rx element for editing. Figure 5-93. Setting the IP Rx element
a. Check the Enabled box to enable IP Rx stream reception. b. Set the name of the IP Rx stream (Name), its destination IP address and destination UDP port (Multicast address and Destination UDP port). c. Set the IP Packet Delay Variation (Network Jitter) of the network expressed in milliseconds (Max IPDV). d. Set the IP Rx stream encapsulation (Encapsulation). e. Enable or disable Forward error Correction (Forward error Correction check box). f. Enable or disable the VLAN tagging (VLAN tagging check box) and select the VLAN Identifier if enabled (VLAN Id field). g. Enable or disable the IP address source selection (Select source IP address check box) and set the source IP address if IP address source selection is enabled (Source IP address field). Refer to section ’IP Rx Dialog Box’ on page 236 for more details about these parameters. h. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
150
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Setting the Service Configuration 1. Proceed as follows: Right-click the IP receive element then select the shortcut command Add / Service Input if the TS is received on the Ethernet interface, or Right-click the ASI port element then select the shortcut command Add / Service Input if the TS is received on the ASI interface. Figure 5-94. Selecting Add / Service Input
if the TS is coming from an Ethernet interface
if the TS is coming from the ASI port
The Input Service element is automatically added. Figure 5-95. Input Service element is displayed
if the TS is coming from an Ethernet interface
if the TS is coming from the ASI port
2. Double-click the Input Service element for editing.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
151
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Figure 5-96. Setting the Input Service element
a. Set the General parameters (Service selection mode). Select the type of service selection: First Service, By Pid, By Service ID, By service name. If Service selection mode = By Service ID: Set the Id of the service to be decoded (Service ID). If Service selection mode = By Service Name: Set the name of the service to be decoded (Service Name). b. Set the TS redundancy (Enabled box and TS redundancy status). c. Set the Descrambling (Enabled box and Profile selection). d. If Service selection mode = By Pid: - Video: Check the Enable video box to enable video decoding. Set the video PID (Pid) and the PMT PID (PMT). Select also the pattern to be displayed when video PID is absent in the incoming TS (No Video Pid). - Audio: Up to 8 audio components can be decoded. Add audio component and check the Enable Audio x box to enable component processing. Set the audio PID (Pid) and the format of the audio to decode (Output Format). - If Service selection mode = By Pid: Add Ancillary/VBI component and check the Enable Ancillary/VBI box to enable the component processing. Set the Ancillary/VBI PID (Pid) and the Transport format (Transport format (SMPTE 2038, EN 301 775, HD Teletext (OP47) or RDD-11). e. If Service selection mode differs from By Pid: - Video: Select the pattern to be displayed when video PID is absent in the incoming TS (No Video Pid).
152
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
- Audio: Up to 8 audio components can be decoded. Check the Enable Audio x box to enable component processing. f. Refer to section ’Input Service Dialog Box’ on page 238 for more details about these parameters. g. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
To decode a second service from the same ASI input, right-click first the ASI Input element then select the shortcut command Add / Service Input to create a second Input Service element.
A second sub-branch is created
Setting the SDI Output Interface 1. Right-click the Input Service element then select the shortcut command Add / SDI Output Interface. Figure 5-97. Selecting Add / SDI Output Interface
The SDI Output: Pair x element is automatically added. Figure 5-98. SDI Output: Pair x element is displayed
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
153
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
2. Double-click the SDI Output: Pair x element for editing. Figure 5-99. Setting the SDI Output: Pair x element
a. Check the Activity box to enable the SDI Output pair. b. Select the SDI output pair (Pair 1 (IO1 + IO2) or Pair 2 (IO3 + IO4)). c. Set the Decoder output: Output Standard, SD Aspect Ratio, Scaling Mode and Scaling Type. d. Select the HD ANC or SD ANC and VBI that will be embedded in the SDI output. e. Edit the Genlock parameters (Frame Synchronizer). Refer to section ’SDI Output: Pair x Dialog Box’ on page 242 for more details about these parameters. f. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
Setting the Audio Output Interface (Single Channel MPEG board) 1. Right-click the Input Service element then select the shortcut command Add / Audio Output Interface. Figure 5-100. Selecting Add / Audio Output Interface
The Audio Outputs element is automatically added.
154
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Figure 5-101. Audio Outputs element is displayed
2. Double-click the Audio Outputs element for editing. Figure 5-102. Setting the Audio Outputs element
a. Indicate the type of audio (Digital / Analog) on the 4 XLR connectors (Out1 to Out4). Analog Audio: Indicate the number of the processed component and the output level. Digital Audio: Indicate the number of the processed component. Refer to section ’Audio Outputs Dialog Box’ on page 245 for more details about these parameters. b. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
155
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Setting a Modulator Creating the Modulator Branch 1. Right-click Sources then select the shortcut command Add / Modulator IF - BAND Module or Add / Modulator L- BAND Module. Figure 5-103. Adding Modulator
A branch is automatically created. It comprises 4 basic elements Slot x Modulator, TS Selection, Modulation and RF Output. They contain default values. The parameters of each element will be changed in the next steps. Other elements such as ASI Monitoring will be added to the branch later on at the Operator’s request as explained in this section. Figure 5-104. Default L Band or IF Band Modulator branch
Slot x - Modulator element
156
TS Selection element
Modulation element
RF/IF Output element
To delete the branch, first right-click the first element Slot x Modulator then select the shortcut command Delete branch.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Selecting the Slot 1. Double-click the first element Slot x - Modulator for editing. Figure 5-105. Setting the Slot x - Modulator element
a. Enter the number of the slot the Modulator is plugged to. b. Enter the Modulator name. Refer to section ’Slot x - Modulator Dialog Box’ on page 246 for more details about these parameters. c. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
Selecting the TS Source 1. Double-click the second element TS Selection for editing. Figure 5-106. Setting the TS Selection element
a. Edit the TS source parameter (Internal, Auto ASI In 1-2, ASI In1, ASI In2). Refer to section ’TS Selection Dialog Box’ on page 247 for more details about these parameters. b. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
157
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Creating ASI Output Monitoring 1. Right-click the TS Selection element then select the shortcut command Add / ASI Output Monitoring to add the ASI monitoring component. Figure 5-107. Selecting ASI Output Monitoring
An ASI Monitoring element is automatically added. Figure 5-108. ASI Monitoring element displayed
2. Double-click the ASI Monitoring element for editing. Figure 5-109. Setting the ASI Monitoring element
a. Edit the ASI Monitoring Output parameter (Disable, ASI1, ASI2 Internal, Active Stream). Refer to section ’ASI Monitoring Dialog Box’ on page 247 for more details about these parameters. b. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
158
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Setting Modulation 1. Double-click the Modulation element for editing. Figure 5-110. Setting the Modulation element DVB-S2 or DVB-S2X Standard
DVB-S/DSNG Standard
a. Edit the Modulation parameters (General parameters). Refer to section ’Modulation Dialog Box’ on page 248 for more details about these parameters. b. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
159
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Setting the RF Output 1. Double-click the RF Output element for editing. Figure 5-111. Setting the RF Output element
a. Edit the RF parameters (RF Output , Output , Auto RF Power Off Conditions, ClockSynchro). Refer to section ’RF Output Dialog Box’ on page 250 for more details about these parameters. b. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
160
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Basic Settings
Applying or Sending the Configuration to the Equipment 1. Click Check in the toolbar to find out whether or not the configuration is coherent. Figure 5-112. Check report
2. Click Apply to apply the new configuration to the equipment, or Send to just send it to the equipment without applying it (the new configuration is automatically checked before being applied or sent).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
161
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
Advanced Settings Advanced Settings, MPEG Encoder Creating an Ancillary Component To create an Ancillary component: 1. Right-click the SDI Input element then select the shortcut command Add / Ancillary Encoder. Figure 5-113. Selecting the shortcut command Add / Ancillary Encoder
An Ancillary Encoder element is automatically added. Figure 5-114. Ancillary Encoder element is displayed
2. Double-click the Ancillary Encoder element for editing. Figure 5-115. Setting the Ancillary Encoder element
a. Check the Enable box to enable carriage of the ANC. b. Select the Ancillary mode: Transparent or HD Teletext (OP47). If HD Teletext is selected, set the HD Teletext parameters (Language, Teletext Type, Magazine number and Page Number). Refer to section ’Ancillary Encoder Dialog Box’ on page 221 for more details about these parameters. c. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
162
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
3. Right-click the Ancillary Encoder element then select the shortcut command Insert into / Output Service (x) to add the component to the service previously created for the video component. Figure 5-116. Selecting Insert into / Output service (x)
A link to the Output service is automatically created. Figure 5-117. Ancillary element with a link to the Output service element is displayed
4. Double-click the Pid 5392 element for editing. Figure 5-118. Setting the Ancillary Pid element
a. Set the PID of the Ancillary component (Pid). b. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
163
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
Creating a VBI Component A VBI component can be created in SD mode only. To create a VBI component: 1. Right-click the SDI Input element then select the shortcut command Add / VBI Encoder. Figure 5-119. Selecting the shortcut command Add / VBI Encoder
A VBI Encoder element is automatically added. Figure 5-120. VBI Encoder element is displayed
2. Double-click the VBI Encoder element for editing. Figure 5-121. Setting the VBI Encoder element
625 l 525 l
a. Check the Enable box to enable transmission of the selected VBI lines. b. Select the VBI selection mode and the lines which can be added to the VBI component. Refer to section ’VBI Encoder Dialog Box’ on page 223 for more details about these parameters. c. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
164
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
3. Right-click the VBI Encoder element then select the shortcut command Insert into / Output Service (x) to add the component to the service previously created for the video component. Figure 5-122. Selecting Insert into / (Output Service x)
The VBI Pid element is automatically created with a link to the Output service. Figure 5-123. VBI element with a link to the Output Service element is displayed
4. Double-click the Pid element for editing. Figure 5-124. Setting the VBI Pid element
a. Set the PID of the VBI component (Pid). b. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
165
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
Creating an SCTE 35 Component SCTE 104 to SCTE 35 is an optional feature used to translate SCTE-104 messages to SCTE 35 messages. An SCTE 35 component can be created from an SMPTE 2010 DPI message (SDI input) or SCTE 104 DPI message (C&C IP input). To create an SCTE 35 component: 1. Right-click the SDI Input element then select the shortcut command Add / Dpi Encoder. Figure 5-125. Selecting the shortcut command Add / Dpi Encoder
A Dpi Encoder element is automatically added. Figure 5-126. Dpi Encoder element displayed
2. Double-click the Dpi Encoder element for editing. Figure 5-127. Setting the Dpi Encoder element
a. Check the Enable box to enable transmission of the splice message. b. Select the Specific Parameters message type (SMPTE 2010 or SCTE 104 over IP and SCTE 104 IP Port). c. Check the SCTE35 table repetition box to repeat SCTE 35 table sending and set the Maximum number of repetition. d. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings. 166
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
3. Right-click the Dpi Encoder element then select the shortcut command Insert into / Output Service (x) to add the component to the service previously created for the video component. Figure 5-128. Selecting Insert into / (Output Service x)
The Dpi Pid element is automatically created with a link to the Output service. Figure 5-129. Dpi element with a link to the Output Service element displayed
4. Double-click the Pid element for editing. Figure 5-130. Setting the Dpi Pid element
a. Set the PID of the Dpi component (Pid). b. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
167
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
Creating an MPTS across MPEG Encoder Boards Multiplexing across boards is an optional feature. It allows an MPTS to be formed from all the components generated on the different Encoder boards of the device. One option (1 multiplexer) can be instantiated per MPEG Encoder board. Multiplexing runs simultaneously with encoders. To illustrate creation of an MPTS including components encoded on different Encoder boards, the following example is used: 2 SPTS encoded in Encoder board slot 1 are multiplexed with 2 SPTS encoded in Encoder board slot 2. The output multiplexer is located on Encoder board slot 2. Figure 5-131. Slot 1 and Slot2 Encoders
1. Right-click the Transport Stream (1) element then select the shortcut command Add / TS to MPTS. Figure 5-132. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS to MPTS
A TS to MPTS element is automatically added.
168
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
Figure 5-133. TS to MPTS element displayed
2. Double-click the TS to MPTS element for editing. Figure 5-134. Setting the TS to MPTS element
a. Check Enabled to enable connection to slot number x. b. Set the number of the slot that hosts the output multiplexer (2 in this example). c. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings. 3. Follow the same procedure with the second TS (Transport Stream (10)). 2 TS to MPTS elements are displayed: Figure 5-135. TS to MPTS elements
4. Right-click the Slot 2 (xxxx) element then select the shortcut command Add / MPTS Input Interface. Figure 5-136. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS to MPTS
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
169
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
An MPTS Input element is automatically added. Figure 5-137. MPTS Input element displayed
5. Double-click the MPTS Input element to check the inputs of the element. Figure 5-138. MPTS Input element
6. Click the cross the box.
in the top right corner of the dialog box to close
7. Right-click the MPTS Input element then select the shortcut command Insert into / Transport Stream (xxx). Figure 5-139. Selecting the shortcut command Insert into / Transport Stream (xxx)
External SPTS are then multiplexed with internal SPTS and the MPTS is available on LAN 1.
170
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
Figure 5-140. MPTS Input element displayed
External SPTS
Adding an External Component to a service To add an external component to a service: 1. Right-click the Slotx - Dual-Encoder element then select the shortcut command Add / MPEG TS ASI Input Interface. Figure 5-141. Selecting the shortcut command Add / MPEG TS ASI Input Interface
An ASI Input element is automatically added. Figure 5-142. ASI Input element displayed
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
171
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
2. Double-click the ASI Input element for editing. Figure 5-143. Setting the ASI Input element
a. Check Activity to enable the IO5 input b. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings. 3. Right-click the ASI Input element then select the shortcut command Add / External Component. An External component element is automatically added. Figure 5-144. Adding an External Component element
4. Double-click the External component element for editing. Figure 5-145. Setting the External component element
a. Check the Enable box to enable carriage of the component. b. Set the component parameters:
172
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
Parameters Enable
Check Enable to enable carriage of the component
Input Pid
PID of the external component at the Encoder input (value from 33 to 8190).
Stream Type
Type of stream: Private packets or Private section.
Descriptors Descriptor
If necessary, click Add descriptor to add (descriptor_tag 0x59) and configure the DVB subtitle component descriptor. Language: Used to indicate the language of the subtitling. Subtitling Type: Used to indicate the type of the subtitling. Composition page id: Used to indicate the composition page id of the DVB teletext. Ancillary page id: Used to indicate the ancillary page id of the DVB teletext.
c. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings. 5. Right-click the External component element then select the shortcut command Insert into / Output service (x). A link via a PID element is automatically added. Figure 5-146. Adding an External component to a service
6. Double-click the PID element for editing. Figure 5-147. Setting the External component output PID element
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
173
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
a. Enter the component output PID (value from 33 to 8190). b. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
174
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
Setting Automatic Encoding configuration Principle Automatic Encoding configuration Mode is used to configure an Encoder according to the detected input video format. According to the input video format, the Encoder is automatically reconfigured with a pre-defined configuration defined by the User. A pre-defined configuration is a partial configuration named "Encoding Profile". Automatic Encoding configuration Mode is not applicable for MPTS configurations. 6 Encoding profiles can be supported (one per video format: 720 x 576 i @25Hz, 720 x 480 i @29.97Hz, 1920 x 1080 i @25Hz, 1920 x 1080 i @29.97Hz, 1280 x 720 P @ 50 Hz, 1280 x 720 P @ 59.94Hz). An Encoding Profile defines the following configurations:
Video Encoder
Audio Encoder(s)
VBI Encoder
Ancillary Encoder
External component(s)
Output Service
Transport Stream
Figure 5-148. Encoding Profile contour
Encoding Profile
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
175
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
Setting an Encoding Profile Creating an Encoding Profile
Creating an Encoding Profiles directory 1. Right-click the Sources element then select the shortcut command Add / Encoding Profiles to add an Encoding Profiles directory. Figure 5-149. Selecting Add / Encoding Profiles
The Encoding Profiles directory is automatically added. Figure 5-150. Encoding Profiles directory is displayed
Creating an Encoding Profile element 1. Right-click the Encoding Profiles directory then select the shortcut command Add / Encoding Profile to add an Encoding Profile element. Figure 5-151. Selecting Add / Encoding Profile
An Encoding Profile element is automatically added. Figure 5-152. Encoding Profile element is displayed
176
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
2. If necessary, right-click the Encoding Profiles directory then select the shortcut command Add / Encoding Profile to add another Encoding Profile element. The 2 Encoding Profile elements are displayed. Figure 5-153. 2 Encoding Profile elements are displayed
3. Double-click the Encoding Profile Element for editing. Figure 5-154. Setting the Encoding Profile Element
a. Enter the name of the Encoding Profile (HD 1080i for example). b. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings. Adding Encoders and External component(s) to an Encoding Profile element Right-click the Encoding Profile element then select the shortcut command Add / Video Encoder to add a Video Encoder, Add / Audio Encoder to add an Audio Encoder, Add / Ancillary Encoder to add an Ancillary Encoder, Add / VBI Encoder to add a VBI Encoder, Add / External Component to add an External component or Add / Dpi Encoder to add a DPI Encoder. Figure 5-155. Add / Encoders & External component(s)
4. Refer to section ’Creating the Compressed Video Component’ on page 126 to configure the Video Encoder.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
177
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
5. Refer to section ’Creating the Compressed Audio Component(s) Dual Channels MPEG board’ on page 129 to configure the Audio Encoder(s) or section ’Creating the Compressed Audio Component(s) - Single Channel MPEG board’ on page 132 to configure the Audio Inputs and the Audio Encoder(s). 6. Refer to section ’Creating an Ancillary Component’ on page 162 to configure the Ancillary Encoder. 7. Refer to section ’Creating a VBI Component’ on page 164 to configure the VBI Encoder. 8. Refer to section ’Creating an SCTE 35 Component’ on page 166 to add and configure a DPI Encoder. 9. Refer to section ’Adding an External Component to a service’ on page 171 to add an External component and configure the External component element. Figure 5-156. Encoders in an Encoding Profile element
Setting the Service 1. Right-click the Video Encoder element then select the shortcut command Insert into new / Output service to add the compressed video component to a new service. 2. Refer to section ’Setting the MPEG Program (DVB Service)’ on page 128 to configure the service. 3. Right-click the Audio Encoder element then select the shortcut command Insert / Output service to add the audio component to the service. 4. Right-click the Ancillary Encoder element then select the shortcut command Insert / Output service to add the Ancillary component to the service. 5. Right-click the VBI Encoder element then select the shortcut command Insert / Output service to add the VBI component to the service.
178
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
6. Right-click the Dpi Encoder element then select the shortcut command Insert / Output service to add the SCTE 35 component to the service. 7. Right-click the External component element then select the shortcut command Insert / Output service to add the external component to the service. Figure 5-157. Encoders, External component and Output service
Setting the Transport Stream 1. Right-click the Output Service element then select the shortcut command Insert into new / MPEG Transport Stream to insert the service into a Transport Stream. 2. Refer to section ’Setting the Transport Stream’ on page 136 to configure the Transport Stream.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
179
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
Figure 5-158. Encoding Profiles, Example
1 HD 1080i Encoding Profile
2 SD 625 Encoding Profile
Selecting an Encoding Profile in an MPEG Encoder Encoding Profile selection is automatic and depends on the Video input format. For automatic Profile selection to apply, an Encoding Profile selector must be inserted in the MPEG Encoder branch. The Encoding Profile selector replaces:
180
Video Encoder
Audio Encoder(s)
VBI Encoder
Ancillary Encoder
DPI Encoder
External component(s)
Output Service
Transport Stream
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
Creating the Encoder Branch with a Profile selector
Creating MPEG Encoder Right-click Sources then select the shortcut command Add Encoder Dual Module. Figure 5-159. Adding MPEG Encoder
A branch is automatically created. It comprises the basic element Slot x - Dual-Encoder. Selecting the Encoder Slot 1. Double-click the first element Slot x - Dual- Encoder for editing. Figure 5-160. Setting the Slot - Encoder element
2. Enter the number of the slot the Encoder is plugged to. 3. Enter the Encoder name. Refer to section ’Slot x - Dual-Encoder Dialog Box’ on page 206 for more details about these parameters. 4. Select Broadcast Status = On Air. 5. Click the cross the new settings.
in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable
Selecting the SDI input interface Right-click Slot x- Encoder then select the shortcut command Add MPEG Encoder Input interface.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
181
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
Figure 5-161. Adding SDI Input interface
The SDI Input element is added. Figure 5-162. SDI Input element
1. Double-click the SDI Input element for editing and source selection. Figure 5-163. Setting the SDI input interface element
2. To set the SDI Input element, refer to section ’SDI Input Dialog Box’ on page 207. If necessary, add the ASI input interface used for external component(s) Right-click Slot x - Dual-Encoder then select the shortcut command Add MPEG TS ASI Input interface. Figure 5-164. Adding ASI Input interface
The ASI Input element is added. Figure 5-165. ASI Input element
1. Double-click the element ASI Input for editing.
182
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
Figure 5-166. Setting the ASI Input element
2. Check the Activity box to enable the IO5 ASI input. Adding the Encoder Profile selector 1. Right-click the SDI Input element then select the shortcut command Add / Encoder Profile selector to add a Profile selector. Figure 5-167. Selecting Add / Encoder Profile selector
A Profile selector element is automatically added. Figure 5-168. Profile selector element is displayed
2. Double-click the Profile selector element to configure Auto configuration rule(s). Figure 5-169. Setting the Profile selector element
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
183
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
Click to add an Auto configuration rule. Input standard
Choice of video input standard to associate with the Profile selected (Profile selection) below.
Profile selection
Profile to be used if the video at the Encoder input is equal to Input Standard above.
3. Click the cross the new settings.
in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable
If necessary, connect the ASI input used for external component(s) to the Profile selector 1. Right-click the ASI Input element then select the shortcut command Add / Profile selector to connect the ASI element to the Profile selector. Figure 5-170. Selecting Add / Profile selector
The ASI Input element is connected to the Profile selector. Figure 5-171. ASI Input element connected to Profile selector
Add TS over ASI 1. Right-click the Profile selector element then select the shortcut command Add / TS over ASI. Figure 5-172. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS over ASI
TS over ASI element is automatically added.
184
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
Figure 5-173. TS over ASI element is displayed
2. To set the ASI Output element, refer to section ’Encapsulating TS over IP’ on page 139. Add TS over IP and set the Ethernet Interface 1. Right-click the Profile selector element then select the shortcut command Add / TS over IP. Figure 5-174. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS over IP
The IP Tx element is automatically added. Figure 5-175. IP Tx element is displayed
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
185
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
2. To set the IP Tx element, refer to section ’Encapsulating TS over IP’ on page 139. 3. Right-click the IP Tx element then select the shortcut command Insert into new / Ethernet Output Interface. Figure 5-176. Selecting the shortcut command Insert into new / Ethernet Output Interface
LAN 1 element is automatically added. Figure 5-177. LAN 1 element is displayed
4. To set the LAN 1 element, refer to section ’Setting the Ethernet Interface’ on page 142. Add TS to Modulator 1. Right-click the Profile selector element then select the shortcut command Add / TS to Modulator. Figure 5-178. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS Modulator
The TS to Modulator element is automatically added. Figure 5-179. TS to Modulator element displayed
186
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
2. To set the TS to Modulator element, refer to section ’Linking TS to Modulator’ on page 141. Add TS to MPTS 1. Right-click the Profile selector element then select the shortcut command Add / TS to MPTS. Figure 5-180. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS to MPTS
The TS to MPTS element is automatically added. Figure 5-181. TS to MPTS element displayed
2. To set the TS to MPTS element, refer to section ’Linking TS to MPTS’ on page 142. Profile selector branch Figure 5-182. MPEG Encoder, Profile selector branch
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
187
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
Encoding Profiles and Profile selector block diagram Figure 5-183. Encoding Profiles and Profile selector, MPEG Encoder branch
188
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
Advanced settings, MPEG Decoder Setting TS Redundancy Principle If a TS (nominal TS) is missing in an MPEG Decoder, it will be replaced by another TS (backup TS). Examples: Figure 5-184. TS redundancy with one Ethernet input
Figure 5-185. TS redundancy with two Ethernet inputs
Configuration To create a TS redundancy 1. Set the nominal TS Creating the branch of the nominal TS: a. Add and configure the nominal TS Ethernet Input box. Refer to section ’Selecting the Ethernet Input Interface’ on page 147. b. Add and configure the nominal IP Rx Stream box. Refer to section ’Selecting the IP Rx Stream’ on page 149. c. Add and configure the nominal Input Service box. Refer to section ’Setting the Service Configuration’ on page 151. Set the TS redundancy status: Check Enabled and Input redundancy status on NOMINAL).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
189
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
Figure 5-186. Setting the TS redundancy in the Input service dialog box
d. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings. e. Right-click the Input Service element then select the shortcut command Insert into new / TS Redundancy on Product configuration. Figure 5-187. Selecting Insert into new / TS Redundancy on Product configuration
The TS redundancy element is automatically added. Figure 5-188. TS redundancy element
The nominal TS branch is created: Figure 5-189. Nominal TS branch
190
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
2. Set the backup TS Creating the branch of the backup TS: a. Add and configure the redundancy IP Rx Stream box. Refer to section ’Selecting the IP Rx Stream’ on page 149. b. Add and configure the redundancy Input Service box. Refer to section ’Setting the Service Configuration’ on page 151. Set the TS redundancy status: Check Enabled and Input redundancy status on BACKUP. Figure 5-190. Setting the TS redundancy in the Input service dialog box
c. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings. The backup TS branch is created: Figure 5-191. Backup TS branch
d. Right-click the backup Input Service element then select the shortcut command Insert into TS Redundancy. Figure 5-192. Selecting Insert into / TS redundancy
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
191
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
3. Add and configure SDI output interface. a. Right-click the TS Redundancy element then select the shortcut command Add / SDI Output Interface. Figure 5-193. Selecting Add / SDI Output Interface
The SDI Output element is automatically added. Figure 5-194. SDI Output
b. Configure the SDI Output box. Refer to section ’Setting the SDI Output Interface’ on page 153. 4. Set the TS redundancy mode. a. Double-click the TS Redundancy element for editing. Figure 5-195. TS redundancy Dialog Box
b. Set the TS Redundancy parameters.
192
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
General Input backup mode
Auto delay
Selection of the backup mode. Choice between Force nominal: The selected TS is always the nominal TS Auto Switchback on nominal faultless: When no TS Stream is received on the nominal input, an alarm is raised and the input switches automatically to the backup input. When the alarm is inactive on the nominal Input, the system switches automatically to this nominal input. Auto Switchback on backup fault: When no TS stream is received on the nominal input, an alarm is raised and the input switches automatically to the backup input. The system stays on the backup input until a redundant fault occurs. Force backup: The selected TS is always the backup TS.
backup
Defines the time to switch from nominal input to backup input in auto mode when no TS stream alarm is raised on the nominal input.
Auto nominal delay
Defines the time (in seconds) to switch from backup input to nominal input in auto mode when no TS stream alarm has fallen on the nominal input.
c. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
IO5 connector can be configured as ASI Output to monitor the MPTS at the input of the decoder:
1. Right-click the TS Redundancy element then select the shortcut command Add / TS over ASI. The ASI Output element is automatically added.
2. Double-click the ASI Output element for editing. Refer to section ’ASI Output Dialog Box’ on page 228.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
193
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
Creating ASI to IP and IP to ASI Gateways ASI to IP gateway is an optional feature. It allows an MPEG Transport stream to be exchanged between a CP6000 Encoder and a remote CP6000 Decoder. The Transport Stream is transported transparently and bit-accurately. Two ASI to IP software options must be installed (1 per MPEG Encoder board and 1 per MPEG Decoder board). Figure 5-196. ASI to IP and IP to ASI Gateway features
IP to ASI Gateway feature
ASI to IP Gateway feature
Setting an ASI to IP Gateway, MPEG Encoder To create an ASI to IP gateway: 1. Right-click the Slotx - Dual-Encoder element then select the shortcut command Add / MPEG TS ASI Input Interface. Figure 5-197. Selecting the shortcut command Add / MPEG TS ASI Input Interface
An ASI Input element is automatically added. Figure 5-198. ASI Input element displayed
194
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
2. Double-click the ASI Input element for editing. Figure 5-199. Setting the ASI Input element
a. Check Activity to enable the IO5 input b. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings. 3. Right-click the ASI Input element then select the shortcut command Add / Gateway. A Gateway element is automatically added. Figure 5-200. Adding a Gateway element
4. Double-click the Gateway element for editing. Figure 5-201. Setting the Gateway element
a. Set the Gateway parameters.
Gateway Parameters IGateway Name
Enter the name of the gateway
Threshold Bitrate
Defines the Max bitrate of the TS stream. Accepted values: from 15 kbit/s to 110000 kbit/s
b. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
195
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
5. Right-click the Gateway element then select the shortcut command Add / TS over IP. An IP Tx element is automatically added. Figure 5-202. Adding an IP Rx element
6. Double-click the IP Tx element for editing. Figure 5-203. Setting the IP Tx element
a. Set the IP Tx parameters. Refer to section ’IP Tx Dialog Box’ on page 229 b. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings. 7. Right-click the IP Tx element then select the shortcut command Insert into new / Ethernet Output Interface. A LAN x element is automatically added. Figure 5-204. Adding a LAN x element
196
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
8. Double-click the LAN x element for editing. Figure 5-205. Setting the LAN x element
a. Set the LAN x parameters. Refer to section ’LAN x Dialog Box’ on page 232. b. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings. The ASI to IP gateway is created: Figure 5-206. ASI to IP Gateway
Setting an IP to ASI Gateway, MPEG Decoder To create an IP to ASI gateway: 1. Right-click the LAN x element then select the shortcut command Add / IP Receive. An IP Rx element is automatically added. Figure 5-207. Adding an IP Rx element
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
197
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
2. Double-click the IP Rx element for editing. Figure 5-208. Setting the IP Rx element
a. Set the IP Rx parameters. Refer to section ’IP Rx Dialog Box’ on page 236. b. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings. 3. Right-click the IP Rx element then select the shortcut command Add / Gateway Dec. A Gateway Dec element is automatically added. Figure 5-209. Adding a Gateway Dec element
4. Double-click the Gateway Dec element for editing. Figure 5-210. Setting the Gateway Dec element
a. Enter the Gateway Name. b. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings.
198
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
5. Right-click the Gateway Dec element then select the shortcut command Add / TS over ASI. An ASI Output element is automatically added. Figure 5-211. Adding an ASI Output element
6. Double-click the ASI Output element for editing. Figure 5-212. Setting the ASI Output element
a. Set the ASI Output parameters. Refer to section ’ASI Output Dialog Box’ on page 228. The IO5 Output cannot be modified. b. Click the cross in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable the new settings. The IP to ASI gateway is created: Figure 5-213. IP to ASI Gateway
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
199
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
Setting Scrambling / Descrambling The settings described are shared by the MPEG Encoder and MPEG Decoder boards. They allow to define profiles which will be used to scramble or descramble services. To display the Scrambling configuration box, click configuration panel:
on the
Figure 5-214. Access to scrambling box, configuration panel
Scrambling
The Scrambling box is displayed. Figure 5-215. Scrambling box
Click Scrambling groups to display the scrambling profile(s). Figure 5-216. Profile(s), Scrambling box
To add a new profile right-click Scrambling groups and select Add / Scrambling group. A profile is automatically added. Figure 5-217. Add a Scrambling profile
Click on a profile to edit it. 200
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
Figure 5-218. Edit a Scrambling profile
Parameters Activity
If checked, enables the Scrambling profile.
Name
Name of the scrambling profile. This name is used to select the Scrambling profile in the Encoder Output Service and Decoder Input Service dialog boxes.
Fixed Key Parameters Mode
Scrambling / Descrambling mode. Choice between: BISS 1: Scrambling / Descrambling are performed with a fixed Session Word (SW). BISS E BURIED: Scrambling / Descrambling are performed with an Encrypted Session Word (ESW) and an internal Encoder / Decoder id named buried id. This id is identical for all the MPEG boards. The BISS E BURIED mode of encryption decryption must be used only between CP6000. BISS E INJECTED: Scrambling / Descrambling are performed with an Encrypted Session Word (ESW) and an Injected id.
Session Word (SW)
In BISS 1 mode, Session Word value (6 bytes).
Encrypted Session Word (ESW)
In BISS E BURIED and BISS E INJECTED modes, Encrypted Session Word value (8 bytes).
Injected id
In BISS E INJECTED mode, Injected id value (7 bytes).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
201
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
Setting Automation Principle Instead of applying manually your configurations, you can choose to activate the Schedule mode so that your configurations are applied according to a schedule you will define. The automation system moves from one configuration to another according to the schedule you created. Prerequisite: you must create your configurations in the GUI previously to the schedule. Figure 5-219. Automation tab overview
Display the automation panel
Apply the automation
Edit / Unedit the automation
To schedule your configurations: 1. Define a default configuration that will be the first configuration to be activated. It is also the one that will be used when no other can be activated. 2. Create a list of configurations and define to which conditions these configurations can be activated. These conditions are time conditions only. Thus a configuration can start either:
at a precise date and time, e.g. on May, 27th, 2012 at 3:00,
every day at a precise time, e.g. every day at 9:00,
on a given day of the week at a precise time, e.g. every Tuesday at noon (12:00),
on a given day of the month at a precise time, e.g. every first day of the month at midnight (0:00).
A configuration can also be scheduled for a given duration or to last until another configuration in the list is due to start (no duration).
202
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
3. Create the schedule. Once the schedule is applied, the automation system continuously checks your list of configurations. As soon as it finds one that meets the schedule parameters, even if the current one has not ended, it activates it. If it does not and all time-limited scheduled configurations have ended, it activates the default configuration.
Creating a Schedule 1. Go to the Automation tab. 2. Click the Edit button in the toolbar to enable automation editing. 3. Select Schedule from the Select automation drop-down list. Figure 5-220. Selecting the Schedule mode
When Schedule type is selected,
configurations will be activated using a schedule
basic tools are available in the toolbar for schedule editing.
Figure 5-221. Basic tools
For a description of these tools, refer to section ’Automation Tab’ on page 113. 4. In the Default configuration drop-down list, select the configuration that will be applied by default, i.e. when no configuration of the list is due to be applied. 5. To create the first configuration of your schedule, click the Insert after the current selection button . 6. Where applicable, replace the stars (*) by appropriate values according to the schedule you want to create. Different criteria are available for the scheduled configuration:
Day of the week
Day
Month
Year
Hour
Minute
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
203
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
Two types of events can be selected:
Event without duration. The scheduled configuration is applied at the date specified and until another scheduled configuration is applied.
Event with duration: the scheduled configuration is applied for a certain period of time.
When more than one configuration is to be activated at the same time, the higher configuration in the schedule table will be applied. When no configuration is to be activated, the default configuration is applied.
7. Press ENTER to validate your value or simply click another field. 8. Once all the scheduled configurations are ready, you can send the schedule to the equipment. a. Click the Send button in the toolbar. b. Answer Yes when you are asked for confirmation. Figure 5-222. Confirmation request
If Schedule was selected as the automation type during the editing process, a green clock is visible in the tab header as soon as the automation is running.
It is therefore no longer possible to apply a configuration manually (the Apply button is not available in the configuration toolbar for any configuration). If you want to apply a configuration manually, you must select No automation from the Select automation drop-down list and re-send the configuration to the equipment.
204
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — Advanced Settings
Schedule Example Let us take an example. Suppose today is Tuesday, and it is midnight. Our default configuration is named Default. We have also created four configurations: Conf1, Conf2, Conf3 and Conf4. We want to apply these configurations as follows:
Conf1 should be applied every day at 9:00 during 2 hours.
Conf2 should be applied every day at 12:00 during 3 hours.
Conf3 should be applied every Wednesday at 13:30.
Conf4 should be applied every day at 21:00 during 1:30.
The schedule corresponding to this example is shown in Figure 5-223 below. Figure 5-223. Schedule example
The obtained follow-up of configurations will be as represented in Figure 5-224 below: Figure 5-224. Schedule example
Note that Conf2 is supposed to be applied for 2 hours, but on Wednesday, as Conf3 is due to start at 13:30, Conf2 is stopped and Conf3 is applied.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
205
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
GUI Description This chapter gives the details of the interface dialog boxes.
Dialog Boxes Related to MPEG Encoder Figure 5-225. Encoder configuration
SDI Input Interface box
Video Encoder box Video Pid box
Output Service x box
Slot x - DualEncoder box Audio Pid box
Transport Stream x box
ASI Output box
Ancillary Pid box
LAN x box IP Encapsulation box Audio Encoder box Ancillary Encoder box
Slot x - Dual-Encoder Dialog Box Figure 5-226. Dual-Encoder Dialog Box
Board Parameters
206
Slot Number
Number of the slot the board is plugged to.
Name
Name of the slot.
Channel Mode
Not use in this release. This parameter must be set to Dual.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
SDI Input Dialog Box Figure 5-227. SDI Input: Pair x Dialog Box
Input Interface Input pair
Choice of the SDI input pair between: Pair 1 (IO1 + IO2) Pair 2 (IO3 + IO4) (Dual Channels MPEG board only) Pair 1 and Pair 2 stand for channel 1 and channel 2 respectively.
Source selector
Select the SDI source (IO1, IO2, IO3, IO4) or a test pattern (Bar pattern, Black pattern, Moving pattern). IO3, IO4 are not displayed on a Single Channel MPEG board. IO2 and IO4 can also be configured as ASI outputs.
Input mode
backup
Choice of the SDI input in backup mode Off: SDI input is the SDI input selected above Auto Switchback on nominal faultless: When the signal loss alarm is raised, the SDI input switches automatically to the backup SDI input. When the signal loss alarm is inactive on Nominal Input, the SDI input automatically switches to this input. Auto Switchback on redundant fault: When the signal loss alarm is raised, the SDI input switches automatically to the backup SDI input. The SDI input stays on the backup SDI input until a redundant fault occurs.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Pair 1: The backup mode cannot be used if IO2 is configured as ASI output. Pair 2 (Dual Channels MPEG board only): The backup mode cannot be used if IO4 is configured as ASI output.
207
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
208
Auto delay
backup
Defines the time (in seconds) to switch from nominal input to backup input in auto switch mode when the signal loss alarm is raised on the nominal input.
Auto delay
nominal
Defines the time (in seconds) to switch from backup input to nominal input in auto switch mode when the signal loss alarm has fallen on the nominal input.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Video Encoder Dialog Box Figure 5-228. Video Encoder Dialog Box
Standard Parameters No Source Mode
Input Standard
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Choice between: Bar Pattern Black Pattern Moving Pattern Stop Video: Video component bitrate is null, signaling and all other components are present. Disable Service: Service bitrate is null, there is no signaling and the TS bitrate for this service is null. Default selection: Bar Pattern Choice between: 720 x 576 I @ 25 Hz 720 x 480 I @ 29.97 Hz 1920 x 1080 I @ 25 Hz 1920 x 1080 I @ 29.97 Hz 1920 x 1080 I @ 30 Hz 1280 x 720 p @ 50 Hz 1280 x 720 p @ 59,94 Hz 1280 x 720 p @ 60 Hz Default selection: 1920 x 1080 I @ 25 Hz
209
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Picture Resolution
Picture Format
Used to set the Horizontal Picture Rescaling feature. This feature is used to manage very low encoded rates. Choice between: Input Standard
Horizontal Resolutions
1920 x 1080i
1920, 1440, 1280, 960
1280 x 720p
1280, 960, 640
720 x 576i
720, 704, 640, 544, 528, 480, 352
720 x 480i
720, 704, 640, 544, 528, 480, 352
In SD Input Standard, selection of the format of the picture. Choice between:
Aspect Ratio (4:3, 16/9)a
Active Format Description informationb: - Active format AFD (Letter box...) and - Aspect ratio (AR)
4/3
4:3
None
16/9
16:9
None
4:3 Auto SMPTE2016
4:3
From incoming ancillary AFD (SMPTE 2016-3)
16:9 Auto SMPTE2016
16:9
From incoming ancillary AFD (SMPTE 2016-3)
4:3 Auto Video Index
4:3
From incoming Video Index (SMPTE RP186)
16:9 Auto Video Index
16:9
From incoming Video Index (SMPTE RP186)
4:3 Auto UK Video Index
4:3
From incoming specific UK Video Index
16:9 Auto UK Video Index
16:9
From incoming specific UK Video Index
a Aspect Ratio is transported in Sequence Header in MPEG-2 standard or in SPS (Sequence Parameter Set) in VUI parameter (Video Usability Information) in MPEG-4 standard. b Active Format Description information are transported in USER DATA in MPEG-2 standard or in SEI messages (Supplemental Enhancement Information) in MPEG-4 standard.
WSS Blanking
210
If On, the WSS (1/2 line 23) signal is blanked.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Encoding format
Choice between: H-264 (MPEG-4) MPEG-2 Default selection: H-264 (MPEG-4)
Chroma Format
Choice between: MPEG-2 Encoding format 4:2:0 / 8 bits 4:2:2 / 8 bits H-264 (MPEG-4) Encoding format 4:2:0 / 8 bits 4:2:0 / 10 bits 4:2:2 / 8 bits 4:2:2 / 10 bits Refer to Appendix A ’Video Profiles & Bitrates recommendations’ on page 403.
Profile
Selection of the video profile. The Choice depends on the Encoding Format:
High (HP)
4:2:2 (422P)
MPEG-2 encoding format, Video Profiles Main (MP)
Type of frames
I, P, B
I, P, B
I, P, B
Chroma sampling
4:2:0
4:2:0 4:2:2
4:2:0 4:2:2
Main (MP)
High (HiP)
High 10 (Hi10P)
High 4:2:2 (Hi422P)
MPEG-4 (H264) encoding format, Video Profiles Constrained Baseline (CBP)a
Type of frames
I, P
I, P, B
I, P, B
I, P, B
I, P, B
Entropy coding
CAVLC
CAVLC CAVLC CAVLC CAVLC CABAC CABAC CABAC CABAC
Chroma sampling
4:2:0
4:2:0
4:2:0
4:2:0
4:2:2
Pixel resolution
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
10 bits
8 bits 10 bits
a Only
on progressive video.
Note: An Automatic mode can be selected. In this mode the Profile is automatically determined.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
211
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
212
End to End delay
Choice between: Low delay Standard delay End to End delay does not take care of the delay added by activation of the Frame Synchronizer and additional latency due to IPDV but includes the delay of other modules such as the Multiplexer, Line rephaser, etc. End to End delay = 270 ms in Low Delay End to End delay = 770 ms in Standard Delay Default selection: Low delay
Bitrate
Video bitrate adjustment. Refer to section ’Video Profiles & Bitrates recommendations’ on page 403. If the Video bitrate automatic computing box is checked the Bitrate parameter is not displayed and the necessary video bitrate is automatically determined.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Advanced Parameters Entropy coding
Choice between: CABAC CAVLC This parameter is relevant for H-264 only.
Picture structure
Structure of the picture to be encoded. Choice between: Field Frame MBAFF (MacroBlock Adaptive Frame Field coding) This parameter is relevant for Encoding format = H-264 and End to End delay = Standard only.
P picture Period (M)
Choice between: I only: Only I pictures IP: 1 P picture between 2I pictures IBP: 1 B picture (not available in Low Delay mode). IBBP: 2 B pictures (not available in Low Delay mode). IBBBP: 3 B pictures (available in Standard Delay mode and H-264 (MPEG-4) encoding format and 50/59.94/60 Hz input standard). Automatic where I stands for Intra-coded picture, P for Predictive-coded picture, B for BiPredictive-coded picture.
GOP Size (N)
Accepted values: from 1 to 300. If the Automatic GOP size box is checked the parameter is not displayed and the GOP size is automatically determined. Refer to P Picture Period parameter below.
Picture Filtering
The Picture Filtering feature is used to manage very low encoding rates. It consists of decreasing picture complexity by activating a filter to reduce the high frequency spatial texture. Choice between: None: Filtering is disabled Weak: Filtering is weak Strong: Filtering is strong
Closed GOP
If this box is checked closed GOP mode is activated. Closed GOP mode is used to break temporal dependency between GOPs.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
213
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
214
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Audio Inputs Dialog Box Figure 5-229. Audio Inputs Dialog Box
If a Single Channel MPEG board is used as Encoder, this box is used to indicate the type of audio type injected on the XLR connectors of the breakout cable. Refer to section ’Audio Breakout Cable’ on page 402. Click to add an Analog stereo audio input. Up to 2 analog stereo inputs can be created. Click be created. Click
to add an AES audio input. Up to 4 AES inputs can
to delete an audio input.
Analog Audio Parameters XLR Input
Indicate the XLR used for the analog audio. Choice between: In1(L1)/In2(R1): XLR In1 is used to the left channel and XLR In2 is used to the right channel of the 1st stereo. In3(L2)/In4(R2): XLR In3 is used to the left channel and XLR In4 is used to the right channel of the 2nd stereo.
Alignment
Level in dBu which corresponds to 0 VU. Accepted values: between -6 dBu and +6 dBu in 1 dBu steps.
Headroom
Difference in dB between Alignment level (Alignment parameter below) and input saturation. Accepted values: between +6 dB and +30 dB in 1 dB steps.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
215
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Digital Audio Parameters
216
XLR Input
Indicate the XLR used for the digital audio. Choice between: st In1(AES1): XLR In1 is used to the 1 stereo. nd stereo. In2(AES2): XLR In2 is used to the 2 rd stereo. In3(AES3): XLR In3 is used to the 3 th stereo. In4(AES4): XLR In4 is used to the 4
Sample Rate Conv.
If checked, the audio Sample Rate Converter of the AES input is enabled.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Audio Encoder Dialog Box Figure 5-230. Audio Encoder Dialog Box Audio Mode = Stereo / Dual Channels
Audio Mode = 5.1 Surround (SDI / Digital sources only)
Input Format = PCM (Analog / Digital / SDI sources)
Input Format = Precompressed (SDI / Digital sources only)
Audio Mode= Stereo
Audio Mode = 5.1 Surround
Input Format = Automatic (SDI / Digital sources only)
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
217
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Input Input Format
Choice between: Audio PCM Precompressed (SDI / Digital sources only) Automatic (SDI / Digital sources only) If Input Format is set to Automatic, then the audio encoder detects the audio input format (PCM or precompressed). The Operator sets one audio configuration for PCM audio and another audio configuration for precompressed audio. When PCM audio is detected the PCM audio encoding parameters are applied to encode the audio. When a precompressed audio is detected the Pass-thru standard and signaling mode parameters are used.
Source(s) Audio source
218
SDI / Digital source(s) The Audio Source(s) depend on the input format. If Input Format is set to Audio PCM and - Audio mode = Stereo or Dual Channels then one Audio Source must be selected (L/R). - Audio mode = 5.1 Surround then three Audio Sources must be selected (L/R, C/LFE, LS/RS). If Input Format is set to Precompressed then one Audio Source must be selected. If Input Format is set to Automatic then one or three Audio Sources must be selected. SDI sources, choice between: Stereo 1 (Grp 1/Ch 1-2) Stereo 2 (Grp 1/Ch 3-4) Stereo 3 (Grp 2/Ch 1-2) Stereo 4 (Grp 2/Ch 3-4) Stereo 5 (Grp 3/Ch 1-2) Stereo 6 (Grp 3/Ch 3-4) Stereo 7 (Grp 4/Ch 1-2) Stereo 8 (Grp 4/Ch 3-4) Digital sources, choice between: Digital 1 (In1(AES1)) Digital 2 (In2(AES2)) Digital 3 (In3(AES3)) Digital 4 (In4(AES4)) Analog source(s) Choice between: Analog 1 (In1(L1)-In2(R1)) Analog 2 (In3(L2)-In4(R2))
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Precompressed signaling This parameter is displayed if Input Format is set to Precompressed. Signaling Mode
Encoding mode of the Precompressed audio. Choice between Stereo or 5.1 Surround
Output Audio Standard
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Audio encoding standard. SDI / Digital source(s) If Input format is set to PCM or Automatic, choice between: - MPEG-1 Layer II - Uncompressed (SMPTE 302M) - AAV-LC - AAC-HE - AAC-HE v2.0 - Dolby Digital (AC3) If Input format is set to Precompressed, choice between: - MPEG-1 Layer II Pass-Thru - Dolby E Pass-Thru - AAV-LC Pass-Thru - AAC-HE Pass-Thru - AAC-HE v2.0 Pass-Thru - Dolby Digital (AC3) Pass-Thru Analog source(s) Choice between: - MPEG-1 Layer II - Uncompressed (SMPTE 302M) - AAV-LC - AAC-HE - AAC-HE v2.0 - Dolby Digital (AC3)
219
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Audio Mode
Choice between: MPEG-1 Layer II standard: Stereo Dual channels Mono Left Mono Right AAV-LC, AAC-HE or AAC-HE v2.0 standard: Stereo Dual channels 5.1 Surround (SDI / Digital sources only) AAC-HE v2.0 standard: Stereo Dolby Digital (AC3) standard: Stereo 5.1 Surround (SDI / Digital sources only) Audio mode is not accessible if Uncompressed Audio Standard (SMPTE 302M) is selected or if Input format is set to Precompressed.
Frame per PES
Choice between: One audio frame: One audio frame is transported in a TS packet. Multi Audio Frame: Multiple audio frames are transported in a TS packet. This mode allows to reduce the audio PES bitrate overhead. Frame per PES is only accessible in Standard Delay video encoding mode.
220
Bitrate
Accepted values: MPEG-1 Layer II standard (stereo or mono): 64 to 384 kbit/s AAC-LC standard: Stereo: 32 to 384 kbit/s 5.1 Surround: 96 to 640 kbit/s AAC-HE standard: Stereo: 32 to 192 kbit/s 5.1 Surround: 96 to 640 kbit/s (SDI / Digital sources only) AAC-HE v2.0 standard (stereo): 32 to 96 kbit/s Dolby Digital (AC3) standard: Stereo: 96 to 640 kbit/s 5.1 Surround: 224 to 640 kbit/s (SDI / Digital sources only) Audio Bitrate is not accessible when Uncompressed Audio Standard (SMPTE 302M) is selected.
No Source Mode
Choice between: Sine Tone (400 Hz) Sine Tone (1000 Hz) Silence No source mode is activated when there is no audio at the audio encoder input.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
AAC Syntax
AAC Encapsulation
Delay
Choice between: AAC-LC Audio Standard: MPEG-2 or MPEG-4 AAC Syntax can be selected. AAC-HE v2.0 Audio Standard: AAC Syntax is set to MPEG-4. AAC-HE Audio Standard: AAC Syntax is set to MPEG-2. Choice between: ADTS (Audio Data Transport Stream) LOAS (Low Overhead Audio Stream) if the Syntax is set to MPEG-4.
Audio delay. The value must be set between -100 to 400 ms.
Ancillary Encoder Dialog Box Figure 5-231. Ancillary Encoder Dialog Box
HD or SD formats
HD format
Ancillary Parameters Enable
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Check the Enable box to enable carriage of the ANC.
221
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Ancillary mode
222
Choice between: SD format Transparent (SMPTE 2038): ANC are carried according SMPTE 2038. HD format Transparent (RDD-11): ANC are carried according RDD-11. Transparent (SMPTE 2038): ANC are carried according SMPTE 2038. HD Teletext (OP47): The OP-47 Subtitling Distribution Packet (SDP) data is carried in a dedicated PID via EN 301775 using a user defined data unit ID. OP47 and RDD-11 and SMPTE 2038 mode are exclusive.
Language
Set the Language field of the PMT teletext descriptor. The language can also be indicated in the ISO 639 3-letter codes field if Other is selected.
Teletext Type
Set the Teletext type field of the PMT teletext descriptor. The type of teletext can also be indicated in the User Teletext type field if Other is selected.
Magazine number
Set the Magazine number field of the PMT teletext descriptor. The value must be between 0 and 7.
Page Number (hex value)
Set the Page number field of the PMT teletext descriptor. The value must be between 0 and FF.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
VBI Encoder Dialog Box Figure 5-232. VBI Encoder Dialog Box
625 l
525 l
Parameters Enable
If checked, the selected VBI lines are carried in the VBI component.
VBI selection mode
Choice between: Full Transparent: The VBI lines selected below are carried whatever their type. Normal: The types of VBI lines to carry are selected below.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
223
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Even lines 6 to 23 (625 l) 10 to 25 (525 l)
Full Transparent VBI selection mode: Selection of VBI lines to carry in the VBI component (according to EN 301 775 standard using a user defined data unit ID). Normal VBI selection mode: Selection of VBI types to carry in the VBI component: - TXTB: Teletext Magazine - STIB: Teletext Subtitle - AUTO: Teletext Automatic - MT: Monochrome Transparent - VPS: Video Programing System - WSS: Widescreen signaling Choice between AUTO, TXTB (Teletext Magazine Ceefax B), STIB (Teletext Subtitles only), VPS (Video Program System data), WSS (Widescreen signaling data) and MT (Monochrome Transparent). The AUTO / TXTB / STIB types deliver the same Teletext Ceefax B processing but use VBI stream headers (Data Unit Id) to describe whether the Teletext line is used to send a magazine page or a subtitle page. TXTB imposes the "magazine header", STIB imposes the "subtitle header" and AUTO selects the appropriate header according to the control bit (C6) of the Teletext subtitle sent in the first line of each Teletext page. This header is used by some decoders to easily find subtitle pages in the VBI stream and display them. During operation, there are two possible cases: Either the Operator does not know the type of Teletext lines transported (magazine and/or subtitles). In this case, AUTO should be chosen and it is the encoder which determines the appropriate header. Or the Operator knows the specific lines assigned and chooses between magazine (TXTB) and subtitle (STIB).
Odd lines 319 to 335 (625 l) 273 to 284 (525 l)
224
Full Transparent VBI selection mode: Selection of VBI lines to carry in the VBI component (according to EN 301 775 standard using a user defined data unit ID). Normal VBI selection mode: Selection of VBI types to carry in the VBI component. Refer to the Even lines parameter above.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Output Service Dialog Box Figure 5-233. Output Service Dialog Box
Service Parameters Service Name
Indicates the name of the service which will be displayed on the Web Pages. This field must be set to enable the configuration. Accepted values: User Defined. E.g.: Video 1 Max 32 characters (blank and specific characters are allowed).
Program Number
Accepted values: from 1 to 65535 Default value: 1
PMT PID
Accepted values: from 32 to 8190 Default value: 256
Scrambling Click the parameters. Enabled
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
icon to add a scrambling mode then edit its If checked scrambling is enabled. All the components of the service are scrambled.
225
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Profile selection
Scrambling profile selection. The profiles are defined in the Scrambling page. To display this page click Scrambling on the Configuration toolbar:
’Setting Refer to section Scrambling / Descrambling’ on page 200 for more details about these parameters.
Transport Stream Dialog Box Figure 5-234. Transport Stream Dialog Box
Transport Stream Parameters
226
Activity
Choice between (unchecked).
Enable
(checked)
or
Disable
Original Network Id
Identifies DVB network (inserted in the NIT table). Accepted values: from 0 to 65535 Default value: 1
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Transport Stream Id
Uniquely identifies the outgoing stream (inserted in the signaling tables). Accepted values: from 0 to 65535 Default value: 1
Bitrate
TS bitrate. TS bitrate must never be lower than the sum of the component bitrates. If the Automatic TS bitrate computing box is checked, Bitrate is not displayed and TS bitrate computing is displayed.
TS bitrate computing
Selects the computer of the TS bitrate. Choice between: Auto from encoder: The setting of the encoders connected to the TS determine the TS bitrate. Auto from modulator: The setting of the modulator connected to the TS determines the TS bitrate.
NIT actual Parameters NIT Actual
If checked, insert the NIT table in the TS stream. This feature is mainly used with a modulator.
Load NIT file
Load a NIT file. To load a NIT file: 1. Click Load NIT file. The following screen is displayed:
2. Indicate the path of the file in the Look In box. 3. Select the NIT file Name. 4. Click Open. The file is loaded and displayed in the NIT Actual box. The NIT table can be edited via the SigEditor tool delivered in the CD-ROM with the product. Refer to section ’SigEditor Tool’ on page 300.
Clean NIT
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Clean the NIT.
227
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
ASI Output Dialog Box Figure 5-235. ASI Output Dialog Box
ASI output Activity
Choice between Enable (checked) or Disable (unchecked).
Output
Selection of the ASI output connector. Choice between IO5, IO2 and IO4. Default selection: IO5
TS packet size
Choice between: 188 bytes 188 + 16 bytes Default selection: 188 bytes
Packet mode
Choice between: Data Packet Burst Default selection: Data packet
228
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
IP Tx Dialog Box Figure 5-236. IP Tx Dialog Box RTP/UDP/IP TX Encapsulation
Zixi/UDP/IP TX Encapsulation
Session Connection Parameters Activity
Choice between (unchecked).
Enable
(checked)
or
Disable
TX Encapsulation
Select the IP TX encapsulation. Choice between MPEG/RTP/UDP/IP, MPEG/UDP/IP and MPEG/Zixi/UDP/IP encapsulation.
Destination IP address
The Unicast and Multicast IP range are all IP address values except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255.
Destination UDP port
Accepted values: from 1500 to 65535 Default value: 5000
Zixi Parameters This box is displayed if TX Encapsulation is set to MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP Stream Id
Name of the stream. It must exactly match the stream name defined at the Broadcaster.
Latency
End to end latency of the link. Accepted values: from 300 to 4000 ms.
Fec overhead
Max FEC overhead. Accepted values: from 0 to 30%.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
229
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
FEC block Duration
FEC block duration. Accepted values: from 0 to 200 ms.
Session Adaptation Parameters This box is displayed if TX Encapsulation is set to MPEG/RTP/UDP/IP FEC Mode
Choice between None: FEC is disabled Basic: FEC protection level is set below Expert: FEC protection L & D are set below
FEC protection
Select the FEC protection level in FEC Basic mode. Choice between Low: FEC corrects 5 consecutive IP frames Medium: FEC corrects 10 consecutive IP frames High: FEC corrects 20 consecutive IP frames
L- Column burst length recovery
Select the FEC L Column burst length recovery number in FEC Expert mode. Choice from 4 to 20 Default value: 20
D - Column depth
Select the FEC D Column depth number in FEC Expert mode. Choice from 4 to 20 Default value: 4
Session Advanced Parameters This box is not displayed if TX Encapsulation is set to MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP
230
VLAN tagging and VLAN Id
Enable or disable the VLAN tagging (VLAN tagging check box) and select the VLAN Id (VLAN Id field).
Virtual Source @ and Virtual Source IP @
IP masquerading used to replace the IP address of the Ethernet interface in the IP datagrams (may be required in some redundancy schemes).
Source UDP port
Accepted values: from 1500 to 65535 Default value: 5000
Number of TP per IP frame
This parameter sets the number of MPEG packets conveyed per IP frame. Accepted values: from 1 to 7 Default value: 7
Null Packet stuffing
Choice On/Off Caution: Null packet stuffing is required for the CP6000 / CP6100 decoder. This box must be left checked.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
TOS (hexadecimal value)
DiffServ values in hexadecimal value. Accepted values: Best Effort (BE): 0x00, AF11: 0x28, AF12: 0x30, AF13: 0x38, AF21: 0x48, AF22: 0x50, AF23: 0x58, AF31: 0x68, AF32: 0x70, AF33: 0x78, AF41: 0x88, AF42: 0x90, AF43: 0x98, Expedited Forwarding (EF): 0xB8 Default value: 0x00.
TTL
This parameter sets the data stream TTL (Time To Live), expressed as a number of hops. Each time the IP packet goes through a router, the TTL value is decreased by one unit. When the TTL reaches zero the packet is discarded. Accepted values: 1 to 255 Default value: 32.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
231
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
LAN x Dialog Box Figure 5-237. LAN x Dialog Box
Ethernet Interface
232
Enable interface
Choice between (unchecked).
Enable
(checked)
or
Disable
Port Number
Select the Ethernet port (Port Number). 1 and 2 correspond to the LAN 1 and LAN 2 ports of the board. Agg 1 and Agg 2 correspond to the LAN 1 and LAN 2 ports of the Manager board. If Agg 1 or Agg 2 is selected, the parameters below are not displayed. The Ethernet interfaces of the Manager board are set in the Aggregation configuration page. Refer to section ’Dialog Boxes Related to LAN 1 / LAN 2 ports on the Manager board (CP6000)’ on page 253. Use of the LAN 1/ LAN 2 interfaces of the processing board and the LAN interfaces of the Manager board is exclusive.
IP @
IP address of the interface. Accepted values: all values except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255. Default value: 192.168.0.1
Netmask
Netmask of the interface. Accepted values: all values except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255. Default value: 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway
Default gateway of the interface. In Unicast mode only one Default Gateway must be defined for the two interfaces LAN 1 and LAN 2. In Multicast mode Default Gateway must be set to 0.0.0.0 for the two interfaces LAN 1 and LAN 2. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Interface Speed
Choice between: Auto Negotiation 100 Mb/s 1 Gb/s Default selection: Auto Negotiation
Interface state when disable
Choice between: Link Down: The interface is not powered electrically. Link Up/No Traffic: The interface is powered electrically but it does not support any traffic. A "ping" sent to the interface will not get a response. Link Up/No Multicast: The interface is powered electrically but no stream is sent to the network. "ping" sent to the interface will get a response. Default selection: Link down
IGMP
Select the IGMP protocol used to multicast streams. Choice between: No IGMP IGMPv2 IGMPv3 IGMPv3 with source address When Source IP@ is enabled, IGMP v3 with source address should be used to configure the reception interface. Default selection: IGMPv2
Routes 0 to 4 static routes can be recorded by the Ethernet port. Click the
icon to add a route then edit its parameters.
Destination IP @
Destination IP address. Accepted values: all values except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255. Default value: 192.168.1.0
Netmask
Destination netmask. Accepted values: all values except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255. Default value: 255.255.255.0
Next Hop
Next Hop router to reach the destination. Accepted values: all values except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255. Default value: 192.168.0.253
Cost
Cost of the static route. Accepted values: 1 to 100 Default value: 1
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
233
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Dialog Boxes Related to MPEG Decoder Figure 5-238. Decoder configuration
IP Rx box
LANx box
Service box
SDI Output Interface box
Slot x -Dual Decoder box
ASI Input box
Service box
SDI Output Interface box
Slot x - Dual-Decoder Dialog Box Figure 5-239. Dual-Decoder Dialog Box
Board Parameters
234
Slot Number
Number of the slot the board is plugged to.
Name
Name of the slot.
Channel Mode
Not use in this release. This parameter must be set to Dual.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
ASI INPUT Dialog Box Figure 5-240. ASI Input Dialog Box
ASI IN Activity
Choice between (unchecked).
Enable
(checked)
or
Disable
Source selector
Selection of the ASI input connector. Choice between IO1, IO3 and IO5 (Dual Channels MPEG board) or IO1 and IO5 (Single Channel MPEG board). Default selection: IO5
LAN x Dialog Box Figure 5-241. LAN x Dialog Box
Refer to section ’LAN x Dialog Box’ on page 232.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
235
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
IP Rx Dialog Box Figure 5-242. IP Rx Dialog Box RTP/UDP/IP Encapsulation
Zixi/UDP/IP Encapsulation - P2P Connection
Zixi/UDP/IP Encapsulation - P2MP Connection
236
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Rx Session Connection Parameters Enabled
Enable (checked) or Disable (unchecked) TS reception.
Name
Name of the Rx Stream.
Encapsulation
IP encapsulation type of the received TS. Choice between MPEG/RTP/UDP/IP, MPEG/UDP/IP and MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP.
Multicast address
All IP address values between 224.0.0.1 and 239.255.255.255 are accepted. Default value: 239.0.0.1 Not available if Encapsulation is set to MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP.
Destination UDP port
Accepted values: from 1500 to 65535 Default value: 5000 Not available if Encapsulation MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP.
is
set
to
Max IPDV
The Max IPDV value (IP Packet Delay Variation, Network Jitter) sets the jitter removal processing module. Not available if Encapsulation is set to MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP.
Forward error Correction
Enable (checked) or Disable (unchecked) the FEC feature. Not available if Encapsulation is set to MPEG/UDP/IP or MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP.
Zixi Parameters This box is displayed if Encapsulation is set to MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP Stream Id
Name of the stream. It must exactly match the stream name defined at the Broadcaster (P2MP).
Connection Mode
Mode of connection. Choice between: Point to Multi-Point (P2MP): This mode requires to be connected to a ZIXI Broadcaster. Point to Point (P2P)
Broadcaster IP address
IP address of the Broadcaster in Point to Multi-Point connection mode.
Broadcaster UDP port
UDP port of the Broadcaster in Point to Multi-Point connection mode.
Latency
Max latency for error correction. Accepted values: from 300 to 4000 ms.
Fec overhead
Max FEC overhead. Accepted values: from 0 to 30%.
Fec block
FEC block duration. Accepted values: from 0 to 200 ms.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
237
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Advanced Parameters This box is not displayed if Encapsulation is set to MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP VLAN tagging
Enable (checked) or Disable (unchecked) TS reception.
VLAN Id
Identifier of the VLAN. Accepted values: from 50 to 4094
Select source IP address and Source IP address
Choice Enable (checked) or Disable (unchecked). Fill in the Source IP address field if Source IP address selection is enabled.
Input Service Dialog Box Figure 5-243. Input Service Dialog Box
General Parameters
238
Service selection mode
Selection mode for the service to be decoded. Choice between: First service: The decoder automatically processes the first valid service containing a video component declared in the PAT. By Pid By Service Name By Service ID
Service Name
Selection of the service if Service selection mode is set to By Service Name. A list of service names at the decoder input is displayed.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Service Id
Selection of the service if Service selection mode is set to By Service Id. A list of service Ids at the decoder input is displayed.
TS redundancy Enabled
If checked, enables input TS redundancy.
Input redundancy status
Selection of the TS status. Choice between: Nominal Backup Refer to section ’Configuration’ on page 189.
Descrambling Enabled
If checked, enables the descrambling feature.
Profile selection
Descrambling profile selection. The profiles are defined in the Scrambling page. To display this page click Scrambling on the Configuration toolbar:
’Setting Refer to section Scrambling / Descrambling’ on page 200 for more details about these parameters.
Video (if Service selection mode is set to By Pid) Enable video
If checked, enables decoding of the video component.
Pid
PID of the video component to be decoded.
PMT
PID of the component which carries the PMT.
Encoding format
Encoding format of the video component to be decoded. Choice between: MPEG-2 H-264 (MPEG-4) Default selection: H-264 (MPEG-4)
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
239
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
No Video Pid
Selection of the video at the decoder output if no video to be decoded is detected. Choice between: Bar pattern Black pattern Freeze on last valid frame Default selection: Bar pattern
(if Service selection mode is set to By Service ID, Service Name or First Service) No Video Pid
Selection of the video at the decoder output if no video to be decoded is detected. Choice between: Bar pattern Black pattern Freeze on last valid frame Default selection: Bar pattern
Audio (if Service selection mode is set to By Pid) Click to add an audio component to be processed. Up to 8 audio components can be processed. Audio x:
If Enable is checked, the x audio component is processed.
Pid
PID of the audio component to be decoded.
Output format
Encoding format of the audio component to be processed. Choice between: MPEG1 Layer II Uncompressed (SMPTE 302M) or Dolby E Pass-Thru AAC Dolby Digital (AC3)
Delay
Audio delay. The value must be set between -80 to 100 ms.
Pass-Thru
If checked, audio is transmitted without decoding.
(if Service selection mode is set to By Service ID, Service Name or First Service)
240
Audio 1 to 8
Check the box of the audio component(s) to be processed. Audio 1 is the 1st audio in the PMT, Audio 2 is the 2nd audio in the PMT ..... .
Delay
Audio delay. The value must be set between -80 to 100 ms.
Pass-Thru
If checked, audio is transmitted without decoding. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Ancillary/VBI (if Service selection mode is set to By Pid) Click Add Ancillary/VBI to add an Ancillary/VBI component to be decoded. In the release 04.10, 1 Ancillary/VBI component can be selected. Enable Ancillary / VBI
If checked, enables decoding of the Ancillary / VBI component.
Pid
PID of the Ancillary / VBI component to be decoded.
Transport format
Transport format of the Ancillary / VBI component to be decoded. Choice between: SMPTE 2038 EN 301 775 HD Teletext (OP47) RDD-11
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
241
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
SDI Output: Pair x Dialog Box Figure 5-244. SDI Output Pair x Dialog Box Output Standard = SD
Output Standard = HD
General
242
Activity
If checked, enables the SDI output.
Output Pair
Select the SDI output pair between: Pair 1 (IO1 + IO2) Pair 2 (IO3 + IO4) (Dual Channels MPEG board only) Pair 1 and Pair 2 stand for channel 1 and channel 2 respectively.
Output Standard
Selection of the output standard between: Auto: No format conversion and no scaling. SD: HD to SD format conversion. Scaling mode and type are defined below. Note: The output is disable when 1080i/30 or 720p/60 standards are decoded. HD 1080i: SD to HD 1080i or HD 720p to HD1080i format conversion. Scaling mode and type are defined below. HD 720p: SD to HD 720p or HD 1080i to HD720p format conversion. Scaling mode and type are defined below.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
SD Ratio
Aspect
If Output Standard = SD, selection of the SD output aspect ratio. Choice between: 4:3 16:9
Scaling Mode
Selection of the scaling mode. Choice between: Manual: The scaling depends on Scaling Type parameter below. AFD: The scaling depends on AFD extracted from the input signal. AFD with Default: The scaling depends on AFD extracted from input signal. If AFD is missing, then the scaling depends on Scaling Type parameter below.
Scaling Type
Selection of the scaling type if Scaling Mode above is set to Manual or AFD with Default. Output Standard = SD and SD Aspect Ratio = 16:9 Choice between: Anamorphic, 4x3 Pillarbox, 14:9 Pillarbox and Center Cut. Output Standard = SD and SD Aspect Ratio = 4:3 Choice between: Anamorphic, 16x9 Letterbox, 14:9 Letterbox and Center Cut. Output Standard = HD Choice between: 4x3 Pillarbox, 14:9 Pillarbox and Center Cut.
Embedded SD VBI These parameters are displayed if Output Standard is set to SD or Auto. Teletext Video Program System (VPS) Wide Screen Signaling (WSS) Monochrome Transparent Full Transparent
Selection of the VBI embedded in the SDI signal. Refer to Appendix A ’VBI/ANC Processing’ on page 373.
Embedded SD ANC These parameters are displayed if Output Standard is set to SD or Auto. Closed Caption EIA 708-B Time code (ATC) Active Format Description (AFD) Ancillary Transparent (SMPTE-2038)
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Selection of the SD ancillary data embedded in the SDI signal. Refer to Appendix A ’VBI/ANC Processing’ on page 373.
243
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Embedded HD ANC These parameters are displayed if Output Standard is set to HD or Auto. Closed Caption EIA 708-B Time code (ATC) Active Format Description (AFD) Ancillary Transparent (SMPTE-2038) HD Teletext (OP-47) Ancillary Transparent (RDD-11)
Selection of the HD ancillary data embedded in the SDI signal. Refer to Appendix A ’VBI/ANC Processing’ on page 373.
Frame Synchronization
244
Frame Synchronizer
Enables or disables the frame synchronizer. Choice between: Off: Frame synchronizer is disabled. Reference: Frame synchronizer is enabled. The reference signal is injected on the SYN connector on the Manager board.
Pixel offset
SDI output pair phase adjustment (+/- 32000 pixels).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Audio Outputs Dialog Box Figure 5-245. Audio Outputs Dialog Box
If a Single Channel MPEG board is used as Decoder, this box is used to select the audio type on the XLR connectors of the breakout cable. Refer to section ’Audio Breakout Cable’ on page 402. Click to add an analog stereo audio output. Up to 2 analog stereo outputs can be created. Click can be created. Click
to add an AES audio output. Up to 4 AES outputs
to delete an audio output.
Analog Audio Parameters XLR Output
Indicate the XLR used for the analog audio. Choice between: Out1(L1)/Out(R1): XLR Out1 is used to the left channel and XLR Out2 is used to the right channel of the 1st stereo. Out3(L2)/Out(R2): XLR Out3 is used to the left channel and XLR Out4 is used to the right channel of the 2nd stereo.
Source
Number of the audio component (1 to 8).
Level
Audio Level in dBu. Accepted values: between 4 dBu and 24 dBu in 1 dBu steps.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
245
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Digital Audio Parameters XLR Output
Indicate the XLR used for the digital audio. Choice between: st Out1(AES1): XLR Out1 is used to the 1 digital audio. nd digital Out2(AES2): XLR Out2 is used to the 2 audio. rd Out3(AES3): XLR Out3 is used to the 3 digital audio. th digital Out4(AES4): XLR Out4 is used to the 4 audio.
Source
Number of the audio component (1 to 8).
Dialog Boxes Related to the Modulator Figure 5-246. Modulator configuration
Slot x - Modulator box
TS Selection box
Modulation box
RF/IF Output box
ASI Monitoring box
Slot x - Modulator Dialog Box Figure 5-247. Modulator Dialog Box
Board Parameters
246
Slot Number
Number of the slot the board is plugged to.
Name
Name of the slot.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
TS Selection Dialog Box Figure 5-248. TS Selection Dialog Box
Service parameters ITS Selection
Select the source of the TS to modulate (internal or ASI IN x connectors): Internal: TS comes from the MPEG Encoder board. Auto ASI In 1-2: TS comes from ASI IN 1. If the ASI IN 1 stream is interrupted for at least 500 ms, the switch to ASI IN 2 is automatic but if the ASI IN 1 stream is restored, there is no switchback to ASI IN 1. ASI In 1: TS comes from ASI IN 1. ASI In 2: TS comes from ASI IN 2.
ASI Monitoring Dialog Box Figure 5-249. ASI Monitoring Dialog Box
Parameters Output
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Select the source of the signal to monitor. The monitored signal is available on the ASI OUT connector. Choice between: Disable: Monitoring is disabled. ASI In 1: ASI IN 1 TS is monitored. ASI In 2: ASI IN 2 TS is monitored. Internal: The TS from the internal MPEG Encoder is monitored. Active stream: Current stream after Bitrate management and before Modulation blocking is monitored.
247
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Modulation Dialog Box Figure 5-250. Modulation Dialog Box DVB-S2 or DVB-S2X Standard
DVB-S/DSNG Standard
General Parameters (DVB-S2 / DVB-S2X Standards) Standard
Select the Modulation standard. Choice between: DVB-S/DSNG DVB-S/S2 DVB-S/S2X
Modcod
Select the modulation type and code rate.
Pilots Insertion
If checked, the Pilots Insertion feature is enabled.
Frame
Size of the FEC Frame. Choice between: Normal: 64800 bits Short: 16200 bits
Roll-Off
Select the Roll-Off value. Choice between: 0.35, 0.25, 0.20, 0.15, 0.10, 0.05 and Custom.
Roll-Off custom value
Select the Roll-Off value if Roll-Off below is set to custom. Value between: 0.35 and 0.05 in 0.01 steps.
Symbol Rate
Rate of symbol transmission Default value: 45000000 Bauds
Test Mode
Select the test mode. Choice between: Disabled: Test is not activated. PRBS: Pseudo Random Signal is used.
PLS Mode
Select the PLS mode. Choice between: Default: As defined in EN302307 PLS Sequence 1: The PLS Sequence 1 value below is used. PLS Sequence 2: The PLS Sequence 2 value below is used.
248
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
PLS Sequence 1
Refer to PLS Mode parameter above. Sequence initialization on 18 bits (0x0).
PLS Sequence 2
Refer to PLS Mode parameter above. Sequence initialization on 18 bits (0x0).
Rate Adaptation
Select the rate adaptation mode. Choice between: Null packet adaptation Padding Insertion
Max modulated Ts bitrate
Indicates the maximum TS bitrate that can be modulated. This value can be used to set automatically the TS bitrate in the encoder.
General Parameters (DVB-S/DSNG Standard) Standard
Select the Modulation standard. Choice between: DVB-S/DSNG DVB-S2
Modcod
Select the modulation type and code rate.
Symbol Rate
Rate of symbol transmission Default value: 45000000 Bauds
Test Mode
Select the test mode. Choice between: Disabled: The test is not activated. PRBS: Internal Pseudo Random Signal generator is used.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
249
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
RF Output Dialog Box Figure 5-251. RF Output Dialog Box
RF output Parameters. Activity
If checked the RF output is enabled.
Reverse Spectrum
If checked the spectrum at the modulator output is reversed.
RF Output Tilt
Adjust the Tilt correction (in dB/MHz). Accepted values: from -0.040 dB/MHz 0.040 dB/MHz in 0.005 dB/MHz steps.
Output Level
250
to
Level of the RF Output. Accepted values: from -30 dBm to 5 dBm in 0.1 dBm steps.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Modulator Frequency
RF output frequency. Accepted values: L- Band: From 950 MHz to 2150 MHz in 1 Hz steps. Default value: 1550 MHz IF - Band: From 50 MHz to 180 MHz in 1 Hz steps. Default value: 50 MHz Refer also to Freq. Calculator below.
Freq. Calculator Transponder Band OL Translator Transponder Freq
Output Modulator Frequency modulator can be set manually or via a frequency calculator to provide help for inexperienced operators to avoid potential fault. Calculation consists of selecting the upconverter frequency (Transponder Band) and entered the transponder frequency (Transponder Freq), in KHz, given by the satellite operator.
Output Parameters RF Power Type
On
Carried Modulated
Select the un-mute type. Choice between: Direct: RF Power Off to On is abrupt Progressive: RF Power Off to On is progressive If checked the output signal is replaced by a simple sine wave at the RF frequency. The level of the sinus corresponds to the RF Output level. Among other things, this mode enables phase noise measurement without the need for an external amplifier.
Auto RF Power Off Conditions Stream Loss
Input
If checked the RF output is muted when the TS Stream is lost or uncorrected after the Time Out period below.
Loss of Ref. Time Out
If checked the RF output is muted when the external reference is lost after the Time Out period below.
Time Out
Refer to Stream Input Loss and Loss of Ref. Time Out parameters above. Accepted values: From 1 min to 1440 min.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
251
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Clock Synchro Clock Reference
Select the source of the 10MHz clock reference. Choice between: Internal: The internal 10MHz oscillator is used. External: The 10 MHz reference is injected on the REF IN connector. The processing clocks of the modulator are always locked to the internal or external reference signal.
Carried Id
252
Global Unique Identifier
If checked, the GUI and information below are sent.
GPS coordinates
If checked, the Latitude and Longitude coordinates are sent.
Phone
If checked, the Phone number is sent.
Data
If checked the User Data is sent.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
Dialog Boxes Related to LAN 1 / LAN 2 ports on the Manager board (CP6000) LAN 1 or LAN 2 ports can be used to control the equipment (TS over IP and C&C on same port).
To configure the Manager board’s LAN 1 and LAN 2 Ethernet interfaces click the Aggregation button on the toolbar. Figure 5-252. Access to Manager board’s LAN 1/LAN 2 configuration
Aggregation button
The LAN 1/LAN 2 configuration page is displayed: Figure 5-253. LAN 1/LAN 2 configuration page
Port to configure selection
Click LAN Agg 1 or LAN Agg 2 on the left of the page to select the Ethernet port to configure.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
253
Chapter 5 ’Web Browser Interface’ — GUI Description
LAN 1 (Agg 1) LAN 2 (Agg 2) Dialog Box Figure 5-254. Ethernet Interface Dialog Box
The LAN 1/LAN 2 configuration is not global. It should be performed in each configuration.
Ethernet Interface Refer to section ’LAN x Dialog Box’ on page 232.
Routes 0 to 4 static routes can be recorded by the Ethernet port. Click the
icon to add a route then edit its parameters.
Refer to section ’LAN x Dialog Box’ on page 232.
254
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
6 Servicing Chapter
Introduction This chapter describes the following servicing operations:
Installing software options via the Command Line Interface.
Displaying Unit information.
Installing / Replacing an LCD Front Panel.
Replacing a MPEG Board.
Cleaning air inlet grill.
Content of this Chapter ’Ordering and Installing Software Options’ ............................page 256 ’Displaying Unit information’ ....................................................page 260 ’Installing or Replacing an LCD Front Panel (CP6000)’ .........page 261 ’Replacing a MPEG Board’ .........................................................page 262 ’Replacing a Modulator Board’ .................................................page 264 ’Cleaning the Air Inlet Grill’ .......................................................page 265
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
255
Chapter 6 ’Servicing’ — Ordering and Installing Software Options
Ordering and Installing Software Options Introduction The purpose of this section is to explain the procedures for displaying device software option status and for ordering and installing a software option. If the options are ordered with the product, they will be installed in-factory and will be available to the Operator straight away. The operations described in this section are performed using the Command Line Interface.
Accessing the Command Line Interface Refer to section ’Accessing the Command Line Interface’ on page 51.
Entering the Login and Password Refer to section ’Entering the Login and Password’ on page 52.
Ordering / Installing software options This section provides information to order software options and to install it in the device.
Ordering software options process To order software options from Thomson Video Networks, please provide Thomson Video Networks:
The software options of the same type already installed in the device. Refer to section ’Displaying Software Options (lsopt)’ on page 257.
The equipment code of your device. Refer to section ’Displaying the Equipment Code (eqcod)’ on page 258.
The serial number of your device. Refer to section ’Status Bar’ on page 95.
The software options required.
Thomson Video Networks will then supply a specific key per type of option (which is unique and can only be used for your Platform).
256
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 6 ’Servicing’ — Ordering and Installing Software Options
Installing software options process To install software options:
Uninstall software options of the same type as those to be installed (change in number of options of the same type). Refer to section ’Uninstalling a Software Option (rmopt)’ on page 258.
Install software options using the key supplied by Thomson Video Networks. Refer to section ’Installing a Software Option (insopt)’ on page 259.
Displaying Software Options (lsopt) To display software options: 1. Type lsopt after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER on the keyboard. Figure 6-1. Displaying software option status - lsopt command
The following information is displayed: Id
Software option ID.
Ref.
Software option sales reference.
Status
Option status, installed indicates that the option has been installed. "-----" indicates that the option has not been installed.
Key
Key used to install the option.
Number
Number of options.
Comment
Option label.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
257
Chapter 6 ’Servicing’ — Ordering and Installing Software Options
Displaying the Equipment Code (eqcod) 1. Type eqcod after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER on the keyboard. 2. Enter the slot number 0 then press ENTER. Figure 6-2. Reading the equipment code with the CLI - eqcod command
The following information is displayed: EQCOD
eqcod (xxxx) of the device
Uninstalling a Software Option (rmopt) To uninstall a software option: 1. Type rmopt after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER. 2. Enter the Option id of the software option to be uninstalled (see section ’Displaying Software Options (lsopt)’ on page 257 to know the option IDs) then press ENTER. Figure 6-3. Uninstalling a software option via the CLI - rmopt command
3. Type y after Do you really want to remove this option [Y]/[N(default)]? if you wish to confirm option removal or n if you wish to keep the option, then press ENTER. 4. As indicated in the MESSAGE line, you have to reboot the device (reboot command).
258
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 6 ’Servicing’ — Ordering and Installing Software Options
Installing a Software Option (insopt) To install a software option using the code supplied by Thomson Video Networks: 1. Type insopt after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER on the keyboard. 2. Enter the software option Option Key then press ENTER. Figure 6-4. Enabling a software option via the CLI - insopt command
3. To finish installing the option reboot the device (reboot command). 4. Ensure that the option has been validated using the lsopt command (see section ’Displaying Software Options (lsopt)’ on page 257). When an installed option is edited (i.e. if the number of AAC audios must be increased), this option will need to be uninstalled before being reinstalled with the new key (see section below).
Recovering Lost Keys If you have lost a software option key, please contact Thomson Video Networks Customer Services with:
Option purchase order
Equipment code
Sales reference of the option relating to the lost key
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
259
Chapter 6 ’Servicing’ — Displaying Unit information
Displaying Unit information The purpose of this section is to explain the procedures for displaying the Field Replaceable Unit information (FRU).
Displaying Field Replaceable Unit information (frudisp) To display the Field Replaceable Unit information (FRU): 1. Type frudisp after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER. 2. Enter the FRU slot number (1 to 4 for CP6000 or 1 to 2 for CP6100) then press ENTER. Figure 6-5. Displaying the FRU information- frudisp command
260
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 6 ’Servicing’ — Installing or Replacing an LCD Front Panel (CP6000)
Installing or Replacing an LCD Front Panel (CP6000) The ViBE CP6000 Front panel without LCD can be replaced by a Front panel with LCD and keypad. The aim of the LCD front panel is to provide a basic control/command interface for the main settings. Its operation is described in the Front Panel Operation Chapter. Front panel with LCD and keypad reference: CP6x00-OPT-FAV-LCD Procedure for installing/replacing an LCD front panel 1. Remove the front panel by unscrewing the knurled knobs on the front face. Figure 6-6. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 fixing front panel fixing Knurled knobs
Front panel without LCD
Front panel with LCD and Keypad
2. Install the new front panel by screwing the knurled knobs on both sides of the front face, taking care of the correct insertion of the SubD connectors.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
261
Chapter 6 ’Servicing’ — Replacing a MPEG Board
Replacing a MPEG Board Terminology Hot Plug boards can be removed/installed when the device is switched on. There is no risk of damage but all services provided by the chassis will be disrupted. Hot Swap boards can be removed/installed when the device is switched on. There is no risk of damage and services which are not concerned by the function are not disrupted. MPEG boards are Hot swap. MPEG board reference: CP6000-HW-MPEG-B or CP6000-HW-MPEG-C. The CP6000-HW-MPEG-C MPEG board requires a software release of 3.0 or higher to run. To display MPEG board version refer to section ’Displaying Field Replaceable Unit information (frudisp)’ on page 260.
CP6HWMEDAA: CP6000-HW-MPEG-A CP6HWMEDBA: CP6000-HW-MPEG-B CP6HWMEDCA: CP6000-HW-MPEG-C
Procedure for replacing a MPEG board 1. Disconnect the cables on the MPEG board front panel
262
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 6 ’Servicing’ — Replacing a MPEG Board
2. CP6100 only: Unscrew the screws holding the boards retaining bracket and remove the bracket.
Bracket
3. Pull the extractor lever to release the board contacts from the backplane board connector
Extractor lever LAN 1
Audio
MPEG
IO1
IO2
LAN 2
IO5
4. Remove the board 5. Wait 10 seconds 6. Insert the spare MPEG board into its slot 7. CP6100 only: Fix the boards retaining bracket (refer to step 2) 8. Connect the cables on the MPEG board front panel The MPEG board is automatically started and configured via the Manager board.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
263
Chapter 6 ’Servicing’ — Replacing a Modulator Board
Replacing a Modulator Board Modulator boards are hot swap enabled. Procedure for replacing a Modulator board 1. Disconnect the cables on the Modulator board front panel 2. CP6100 only: Unscrew the screws holding the boards retaining bracket and remove the bracket.
Bracket
3. Pull the extractor lever to release the board contacts from the backplane board connector Extractor lever
4. Remove the board 5. Wait 10 seconds 6. Insert the spare Modulator board into its slot 7. CP6100 only: Fix the boards retaining bracket (refer to step 2 above) 8. Connect the cables on the Modulator board front panel The Modulator board is automatically started and configured via the Manager board.
264
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 6 ’Servicing’ — Cleaning the Air Inlet Grill
Cleaning the Air Inlet Grill To prevent the power supply from overheating, you must regularly:
Clean the rack recommendations,
Clean ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform air inlet grills.
filter
according
to
the
manufacturer’s
These operations must be performed at least twice a year. The device must be installed in a room with low dust levels. The maximum density of dust in the air must not exceed 100 μg/m3 and the maximum number of particles with a diameter greater than 1 μm must not exceed 1 million/m3.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
265
Chapter 6 ’Servicing’ — Cleaning the Air Inlet Grill
BLANK PAGE
266
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
7 Troubleshooting Chapter
Introduction If you face any problem with the equipment, consult the FAQ section first. If the problem is not resolved, refer to the Troubleshooting Procedure section where it is explained how to generate a “ReportFile.bin” file to be sent to Thomson Video Customer Service. This file is critical to provide efficient support.
Content of this Chapter ’Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)’ ........................................page 268 ’Troubleshooting Procedure’ .....................................................page 269
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
267
Chapter 7 ’Troubleshooting’ — Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) I have lost the equipment IP address so that I cannot connect to the equipment. What should I do? The factory set ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform IP address and Netmask for the Control and Command port are 192.168.1.1 and 255.255.255.0. These were changed during the installation setup and the new customer set IP settings (address, netmask, default gateway) are the ones that will be required for subsequent connections. If you have lost (or do not know) the last stored customer set IP address, use the front panel to read the Control/Command IP address. See Chapter 4 ’Front Panel Operation’ on page 67.
I cannot download a new package via the Equipment Setup tool. What should I do? Pack invalid is displayed when I download a new package via the Equipment Setup tool.
268
Restart the download because an error occurred during the transfer of data between the server of the Equipment Setup and CP6000.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 7 ’Troubleshooting’ — Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Procedure The procedure is composed of two steps: Generating the report and Getting the report from the equipment. They are described in the following sections.
Generating the Report 1. Click the About button in the bottom right corner of the Graphical User Interface screen to open the About screen. 2. Click the Report tab in the About screen to display the Dump report button. Figure 7-1. Opening the About screen
3. Click Dump report button to launch the report generation. Figure 7-2. Generating the report screen
Wait a while until report generation. A new button (Open report) will be displayed next to the Dump report button.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
269
Chapter 7 ’Troubleshooting’ — Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 7-3. Open report button
Getting the Report From the Equipment 1. Click the Open report button. 2. Save the ReportFile on your local PC. 3. Send this file to Thomson Video Customer Service. This file is critical for providing efficient support.
270
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
8 Tools
Chapter
Introduction This chapter describes the Equipment Setup, Download application and SigEditor tools delivered in the CD-ROM with the product. The Equipment Setup tool is used to download new product packages to one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms. The Download application is used to download new product packages to one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms. It can be used to download new product packages from the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 3.0 software release and above. The SigEditor tool is used to edit SI/PSI tables. In the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms, it is used to edit NIT tables.
Content of this Chapter ’Equipment Setup Tool’ ..............................................................page 272 ’Download application’...............................................................page 289 ’SigEditor Tool’.............................................................................page 300
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
271
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Equipment Setup Tool
Equipment Setup Tool Introduction This section describes the Equipment Setup tool delivered in the CD-ROM with the product. It is used to download new product packages to one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms. It is built upon the Command Line Interface (CLI) module. Figure 8-1. Interfaces with several ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms
Description Overview Equipment Setup provides 3 interfaces:
272
a Graphical User Interface (GUI), which presents available commands and the current state in a comprehensive way to Operators.
a Telnet client interface, to send CLI commands to ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform and receive data and status.
an FTP server interface, to enable ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform to be downloaded with a new product package.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Equipment Setup Tool
In addition, Equipment Setup can store its persistent state (list of recently managed ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms, etc.) to file on a local drive. Internally to Equipment Setup, an action on the GUI results in the sending of one or more CLI commands via the Telnet client, and each CLI response is reflected by the GUI and available information from the embedded FTP server.
Description of the Graphical User Interface Figure 8-2. Description of the Graphical User Interface
Download Area Equipment Area
Messages /Log Area
The application interface is divided into 4 areas. 1. The toolbar which displays the application logo and the connected Operator. It also contains:
a button to set some advanced settings
a button to set the username and password of another Operator wishing to connect to ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
a button to display all useful information about the application software
2. Equipment area: This area displays information about all ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms that the Operator can deal with. Figure 8-3. Information available in the Equipment area
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
273
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Equipment Setup Tool
The following commands are available for the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform present in the Equipment area:
for one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
Figure 8-4. Commands available in the Equipment area for one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
or Connect
for more than one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform:
Figure 8-5. Commands available in the Equipment area for more than one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
or Connect
Using these commands, the Operator can:
274
add or remove an equipment item to/from this list (Remove and Add equipment commands)
connect to or disconnect from one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms (Connect/Disconnect commands)
add ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform to the Download list (Add to download list command). This list is displayed in the Download area
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Equipment Setup Tool
3. Download area: This area contains the connected ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform(s) which have been moved to the Download list (via the Add to download list shortcut command in the Equipment area) with all the commands and information required for the download process. The following commands are available for one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms present in the Download area: Figure 8-6. Commands available in the Download area for one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms
Using these commands, the Operator can:
Select product packages via a file browser to choose the software to download to ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform (Select product package command).
Launch download operation (Launch download command).
Trigger the toggle to enable the newly downloaded software (Toggle command). A toogle leads to an automatic ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform reboot (following Operator confirmation).
Remove ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform from the Download area.
4. Messages area: This area displays messages for the Operator (success or failure of an operation, etc.). Figure 8-7. Example of messages
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
275
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Equipment Setup Tool
PC Setup The default value of the Local IP address is the default IP address of the first network interface (OS-dependent value). The Operator can edit it in the Advanced settings dialog box accessible via the toolbar. Figure 8-8. Command to change the local IP address for the FTP server
Advanced settings button in the toolbar
Local IP address for FTP server text field
Here are some recommendations:
If the PC running Equipment Setup has several network interfaces (e.g.: WiFi and Ethernet, or public and private networks, etc.) and the Operator wants to use a particular interface (e.g.: faster by Ethernet than WiFi) for the download, s/he must indicate the IP address corresponding to this interface as the FTP server IP address.
If the PC has a private IP address (on the LAN) and a public IP address (on a broader network), and the device is to connect to the PC via its public address (e.g.: firewall or router preventing connection via the private address), the Operator must indicate the public IP address of the PC as the FTP server IP address.
In the case of a dynamic IP address (DHCP), it is better not to set the IP address of the FTP server, as the next time Equipment Setup is run, the PC IP address may be different, and it will then need to be reset for the download to work.
Operation This section explains:
276
how to launch Equipment Setup
how to enter the Operator Login and Password
how to add ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform to the Equipment area and to connect to one or more of them
how to download software on to one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Equipment Setup Tool
which type of information is available in the Messages area
Launching Equipment Setup 1. Unzip the .zip file in a dedicated directory (or in any directory). 2. Run the application. The application can be run by simply double-clicking on "EquipmentSetup.jar" but it is advisable to create a shortcut command by double-clicking on "create-shortcuts.vbs" which launches a script. The script creates two shortcut commands: "EquipmentSetup" and "EquipmentSetup-debug". Move or copy the shortcut commands to the Desktop, the Start menu, the Quick Launch Bar, etc. When Equipment Setup is run via the "EquipmentSetup-debug" shortcut command, the logs are written in the "EquipmentSetup-log.txt" file (this file is reset each time the application is launched).
Entering the User Name and Password Before connecting to any ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform, the Operator must provide a username and a password for authentication.
If authentication with one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms fails, the connection(s) to the concerned ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform(s) is (are) closed.
If authentication with one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms is successful, the username used for authentication is displayed in the main window of Equipment Setup.
Figure 8-9. Username displayed in the toolbar
Username used for authentication
Entering the Log In At startup, a dialog window appears to enter the username and the corresponding password to log on.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
277
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Equipment Setup Tool
Figure 8-10. Startup dialog box
User and Password
The default username is the last username used. The default password is the password associated with this username if password storage is enabled in the Advanced settings dialog box accessible via the toolbar, or an empty string otherwise.
Figure 8-11. Command to store user passwords
Advanced settings button in the toolbar
Store user passwords option boxes
Connect equipments
278
In the current release, you can use the following login/password couples: operator/operator or service/service. For download and reboot operations, service/service is required as login/password.
This command enables the Operator to directly connect to ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform(s) already added to the Equipment area in a previous session and programmed to be connected after login (one C checkbox is available per ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform for this purpose, as shown in the following figure).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Equipment Setup Tool
Figure 8-12. "C (Connection at logon)" checkbox in the Equipment area
C (Connection at logon) checkbox
After login to an equipment item or a change in the current user, Equipment Setup gets the list of available CLI commands.
Changing User Name and Password After connecting to one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms, the Operator can authenticate with another username at any time (when no operation is ongoing) using the Change user button in the toolbar. Figure 8-13. Change User
Change user
Managing ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform in the Equipment Area This area displays information about all ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms that the Operator can deal with. Figure 8-14. Information available in the Equipment area
From this area, the Operator can perform the following operations:
Add or remove an equipment item to/from this list (Remove and Add equipment commands).
Connect to or disconnect from one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms (Connect/Disconnect commands).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
279
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Equipment Setup Tool
Add ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform to the Download list (Add to download list command). This list is displayed in the Download area.
These operations are described hereafter.
Adding/Removing ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform to/from the Equipment Area Adding ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
Select the Add Equipment command. This command is available via a floating menu in the Equipment area, a shortcut menu attached to an already declared ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform, or the Add Equipment button at the bottom of the Equipment area. Figure 8-15. Adding Equipment command locations
Three ways of accessing the same Add equipment command
A dialog box is displayed to set the IP address of the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform to be added to the Equipment area. Figure 8-16. Adding a ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
Address
280
The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 IP address or hostname which is used to identify a declared ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Equipment Setup Tool
Connect
This command is used to launch an automatic connection to a ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform just after it has been declared.
The IP address (or the hostname) and device name of the declared ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform are displayed in the Equipment area. Figure 8-17. Declared ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform displayed in the Equipment area
Removing ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
To remove one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform, select the Remove shortcut command. Figure 8-18. Remove shortcut command
To remove several ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms in one step, select the relevant ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform while holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard for multiple discontinuous selection or the SHIFT key for multiple continuous selection then select the Remove shortcut command. A message is displayed asking the Operator for confirmation. Figure 8-19. Confirmation request before ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform removal
Connecting/Disconnecting to/from ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform Once declared, a ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform can be connected.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
281
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Equipment Setup Tool
The connection state of a ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform can be: "Connected", "Not connected", "Connecting", "Error" and also "Downloading", "Stopping Download", "Installing options" and "Rebooting". Figure 8-20. Example of connection state (Connected)
A connected ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform is eligible for download, reboot, etc. The declared equipment list contains one flag per ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform to indicate whether this ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform must be automatically connected when the application is launched (and whether the Operator confirms the connection at startup, see section ’Automatic Connection at Startup After Login’ on page 282). Figure 8-21. C flag in the Equipment area
C flag
Connection
Connection can be:
automatic at startup after login
automatic after ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform declaration
manual
Automatic Connection at Startup After Login
For ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms that have already been installed and programmed to start up automatically after Login, the Yes button just needs to be selected in the Login/Password dialog box. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms programmed to start up automatically after Login are indicated by the C box, which is checked next to each ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform. Refer to section ’Entering the Log In’ on page 277.
282
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Equipment Setup Tool
Automatic Connection After ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform Declaration
Automatic connection can be requested when adding a ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform to the Equipment area. Just authorize the Connect command (button set to Yes). Refer to section ’Adding ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform’ on page 280. Manual Connection
Prerequisites: Manual connection is only possible if the following two conditions are met:
For ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms that have already been installed and programmed to be automatically connected after login, the (Connect equipment) No button must be selected in the Login/Password dialog box when the login details are entered. Refer to section ’Entering the Log In’ on page 277. For ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms to be installed, the (Connect) No button must be selected in the Adding an equipment dialog box when the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform is declared. Refer to section ’Adding ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform’ on page 280.
To connect to one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform, select the Connect shortcut command. Figure 8-22. Connect shortcut command for one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
To connect to several ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms in one step, select the relevant ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform while holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard for multiple discontinuous selection or the SHIFT key for multiple continuous selection then select the Connect shortcut command. Figure 8-23. Connect shortcut command for more than one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
283
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Equipment Setup Tool
If the connection is successful, the status is Connected and the software version is displayed beside the connected ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform. Figure 8-24. "Connected" status with indication of the software version
Software version
If the connection fails, the status is Error and the software version is not displayed. Figure 8-25. "Error" status
Disconnection
To disconnect one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform, select the Disconnect shortcut command. Figure 8-26. Disconnect shortcut command
As in the case of connection, it is possible to disconnect several ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms in one step. Select the relevant ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform while holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard for multiple discontinuous selection or the SHIFT key for multiple continuous selection then select the Disconnect shortcut command. Figure 8-27. Disconnect shortcut command for more than one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
A message is displayed asking the Operator for confirmation. 284
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Equipment Setup Tool
Figure 8-28. Message before ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform disconnection
Once ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform has been disconnected, the status becomes Disconnected. Figure 8-29. "Disconnected" status
Managing ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform in the Download Area The Download area contains the connected ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms which have been moved to the Download list (via the Add to download list shortcut command in the Equipment area) with all the commands and information required for the download process, i.e.: Select product package to select a product package to be downloaded to one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms (whether they are connected or not), by browsing the local file system. Once one product package is selected, the file name of the selected package is displayed in the table for each ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform (as well as the actual firmware/board packages stored in the two ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform memory banks) and the download operation is available.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
285
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Equipment Setup Tool
Figure 8-30. Select product package command
Figure 8-31. Active software, Inactive software, Software to be downloaded
Active software
Inactive software
Software to be downloaded
Launch download command to launch the download operation. This command is available only if a product package has been selected beforehand. A progress bar is displayed for each ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform during the download operation. Figure 8-32. Download in progress
Download progress bar
286
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Equipment Setup Tool
The download can be stopped at any time by using the Stop download shortcut command. Figure 8-33. Stop download shortcut command
Toggle command to enable the newly downloaded software. A toogle leads to an automatic ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform reboot (following Operator confirmation). The "Toggle" operation cannot be performed on several equipment items in one step. Figure 8-34. Toggle shortcut command
Figure 8-35. Confirmation request before ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform reboot
Remove command to remove ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform from the Download list (no confirmation is required from the Operator). Figure 8-36. Remove shortcut command
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
287
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Equipment Setup Tool
Getting Information in the Messages Area Equipment Setup displays messages for the Operator (success or failure of an operation, etc.). Figure 8-37. Example of messages
288
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Download application
Download application Overview This section describes the Download application delivered in the CD-ROM with the product. It is used to download new product packages to one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms from the 3.0 software release and above. The procedure is described below. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 feature two program banks. When downloading is complete, the inactive bank will contain the software release that has just been downloaded but which is inactive, and the active bank will contain the active software release. The toggle function can be used to toggle one software release from the inactive bank so that it becomes the active software release in the active bank. The {Download} application provides the following features:
Simultaneous upgrade of several ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
For an ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 or a group of ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Full upgrade (downloading + toggling)
Downloading only Device firmware upgrades can also be performed via the MediaFlexSUITE. Refer to the MediaFlexSUITE User Manual.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
289
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Download application
Operation Installing and running the application Installing the application To install the {Download} application: 1. Copy the DownloadSetup.exe file on the PC’s hard drive. 2. Launch DownloadSetup.exe to install the {Download} application. The following window will be displayed: Figure 8-38. Installation, {Download} application 1/4
3. Click Next. The following window will be displayed: Figure 8-39. Installation, {Download} application 2/4
290
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Download application
4. Select the destination directory for the files of the {Download} application and click Next. The following window will be displayed: Figure 8-40. Installation, {Download} application 3/4
5. Click Next. The {Download} application is installed. On installation completion the following window will be displayed: Figure 8-41. Installation, {Download} application 4/4
6. Click Finish.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
291
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Download application
Running the application To run the {Download} application: 1. Open the {Download} application folder. Figure 8-42. {Download} application folder
1. Click the Download.exe file. The application’s main window will be displayed: Figure 8-43. Main window, {Download} application
Screen description The main window features two pages:
Devices
Software Release
The {Download} application release number is displayed in the title bar of the main window.
292
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Download application
Devices page Figure 8-44. Devices page, {Download} application
This page displays the list of installed devices and their status. Click a column header to sort its content. Software Release page Figure 8-45. Software Release page, {Download} application
This page is used to select (Browse) the directory containing the software release to download.
Download procedure The download procedure is as follows:
Declare the devices to be upgraded
Select the directory containing the file to be downloaded
Select the devices to be upgraded
Select the operation to be performed (upgrade, download or toggle) The term ’software release’ also refers to a package.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
293
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Download application
Step 1: Declaring the devices to be upgraded Method 1: 1. Click Add on the Devices page. The following dialog box is displayed: Figure 8-46. Name, IP address and Device family of the device to be upgraded, {Download} application
2. Enter the device name, IP address and device family of the device to be upgraded. 3. Click OK. This information will be displayed in the main window. Method 2: 1. Position the mouse cursor on the Devices page and then right-click to display the following shortcut menu: Figure 8-47. Devices page {Download} application
294
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Download application
2. Click Add... . The following dialog box is displayed: Figure 8-48. Name, IP address and Device family of the device to be upgraded, {Download} application
3. Enter the device name, IP address and device family of the device to be upgraded. 4. Click OK. 5. This information will be displayed in the main window. Step 2: Selecting the directory containing the file to be downloaded 1. Click the Software Release tab. 2. Click the Browse... button. 3. Select the directory containing the file to be downloaded. Figure 8-49. Directory containing the file to be downloaded, {Download} application
4. Click OK. The contents of the selected directory will be displayed:
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
295
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Download application
Figure 8-50. Files displayed on the Software Release page, {Download} application
5. If necessary, select the file to be downloaded. Step 3: Selecting devices to upgrade 1. Click the Devices tab. 2. Select the devices to upgrade. To upgrade specific devices, use the standard shortcut operations (Shift + left click) or (Ctrl + right click). To select all devices, use the Select All command in the shortcut menu. Step 4: Selecting the operation to be performed Select the operation to be performed on the selected devices via the shortcut menu: Full Update... , Download only, View or Toggle...
Full Update... command
This command downloads and toggles the file chosen on the Software Release page in each selected device. If the file is already in the device active bank, no operation will be performed. If it is in the inactive bank, this command will toggle it into the active bank. If this file is neither the active bank nor the inactive bank, the file will be downloaded into the inactive bank and then toggled into the active bank.
Download only command
For each selected device this command checks whether the file selected on the Software Release page is in the active or inactive bank. If it cannot be found, the file will be downloaded into the inactive bank.
View or Toggle ... command
The View or Toggle... command will be grayed out (unavailable) if several devices have been selected. This command displays the software releases of the active and inactive banks for the selected device and is used to toggle between these active and inactive banks. 296
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Download application
Figure 8-51. View or Toggle command, {Download} application
Check the box
Inactive software release to active Active software release
To toggle between the active and inactive banks: 1. Check the box to select the device. 2. Click OK. On a Windows 7 platform, if the OK button is not displayed go to Control Panel \ All Control Panel Items \ Display and switch to 100%. Then click Apply and log off/log on.
Other application commands
Edit command This command is used to edit the name and IP address of the device selected in the main window.
Remove command This command is used to delete the selected device from the main window.
Update All... command This button on the Devices page is a shortcut command that is equivalent to Select All + Full Update.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
297
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Download application
Status messages The following status messages may be displayed in the Status column on the Devices page. Table 8-1. Status messages, {Download} application
Status messages
Indications
Connecting...
A socket has been opened to set up a session with the device.
Logging...
The session is open. The connection name has been sent. The application is waiting for a reply from the device.
Read topology...
The device topology read command has been sent. The application is waiting for a reply.
Get SW versions...
The bank content identification command has been sent. The application is waiting for a reply.
Get SW versions (2nd attempt)...
The first attempt at reading the software release has failed. The application is trying again.
OK. SW status read
Reply to the bank content identification command: all the required information is present.
Setup download...
The application is checking whether the download is necessary.
No need to download...
The download is not necessary as the software release is already in the active or inactive bank.
Package already downloaded and The download is not necessary as the is active software release is already in the active bank. Download started for X board(s). The command for file downloading Please wait... has been sent.
298
Downloading... (X %)
The FTP download is complete, the file has been transferred to the device and saving has begun in the flash memory.
Downloading...
The FTP download is complete, the file has been transferred to the device and saving has begun in the flash memory. No information is available about the progress of the operation.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — Download application
Table 8-1. Status messages, {Download} application
Status messages
Indications
Download successful
The file has been transferred to the inactive bank and the identification command has confirmed that the inactive bank contains the appropriate software release.
Toggle done
The toggle command has been sent.
No need to update
The device does not require an upgrade.
Error messages The following error messages may be displayed in the Status column on the Devices page. Table 8-2. Error messages, {Download} application
Error messages Failed. Connection error
Indications Impossible to set up the session. The device is unavailable or in the process of rebooting.
Failed. Login rejected: Too many Too many applications are open. connections Failed. No answer from some Impossible to execute the command boards as some installed boards are not responding. Aborted. Already downloading!
Impossible to execute the command as downloading is in progress.
Failed. Software error.
Software error in the {ViBE Download} application.
Failed. Impossible to connect.
The connection has been lost.
Failed. SW not found in inactive Impossible to toggle banks as inactive bank for X function(s) bank does not contain the required software.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
299
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — SigEditor Tool
SigEditor Tool Overview This section describes the SigEditor tool delivered in the CD-ROM with the product. This user-friendly tool is used to edit all SI/PSI tables. In the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms, the SigEditor tool is used to generate and edit NIT tables. Once the table is ready, it can be saved in a file to be downloaded to the device.
Operation To launch the editor, double-click the SigEditor icon
.
Select the Signaling standard and click Ok. Figure 8-52. SigEditor tool - Selecting the Signaling Standard
The Sigeditor tool main page is displayed Figure 8-53. SigEditor tool - Main page
To edit a table, proceed as follows: 1. Click the Blank page button in the tool bar. A list will be displayed enabling you to choose the table to edit. 300
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — SigEditor Tool
2. Select the table type in the list. 3. Click OK. Figure 8-54. SigEditor tool - Selecting a table to edit it
1. Click the blank page to edit a table.
2. Select the table to edit.
3. Click OK.
4. Edit the fields of section 0 which is displayed in compliance with MPEG-2 ISO 13818-1: “Generic Coding of Moving Pictures and Associated Audio: Systems” standard and ETSI EN 300 468: “Service Information (SI) in DVB Systems”. 5. Add descriptors to each descriptor loop via the Add Descriptor shortcut command. 6. Choose the descriptor type in the list then click OK.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
301
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — SigEditor Tool
Figure 8-55. SigEditor tool - Adding a descriptor
8. Save
4. Select each field and edit the corresponding .
5. Right click Descriptor to select the Add Descriptor command.
6. Select the descriptor.
302
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — SigEditor Tool
7. Edit the field(s) of the descriptor. Figure 8-56. SigEditor tool - Editing the descriptor fields
7. Edit the descriptor.
8. Add other sections if needed via the Add Section shortcut command attached to the root. 9. Save the table by clicking on the Save button
in the tool bar.
Figure 8-57. SigEditor tool - Adding a section
9. Save
8. Right click Table to select the Add Section command.
A file browser enables you to name the file and choose the target directory.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
303
Chapter 8 ’Tools’ — SigEditor Tool
Figure 8-58. SigEditor tool - File browser
10. Click Save command.
10. Click Save.
304
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
A Technical Specifications Appendix
Introduction This chapter gives:
specifications of the device
specifications of the MPEG Encoder, MPEG Decoder and Modulator boards
device compliance
certifications and environmental specifications
ordering guide to order the device and its options
Content of this Chapter ’General Device Specifications’ ................................................page 306 ’Chassis Specifications’ ..............................................................page 317 ’Manager Board Specifications’................................................page 318 ’MPEG Encoder Specifications’.................................................page 327 ’MPEG Decoder Specifications’.................................................page 359 ’DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications’ ..........................page 378 ’Standard Compliance’ ...............................................................page 386 ’Certifications and Environmental Specifications’ .................page 388 ’Ordering Guide’ ..........................................................................page 392
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
305
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — General Device Specifications
General Device Specifications Electrical Specifications Power supply - ViBE CP6000 AC Power Supply
for Base system with single AC PSU
Table A-1. AC Power Supply specifications for Base system with single AC PSU - CP6000
Standards
306
Title
Mains voltage
100 - 240 VAC (one range with no switching).
Mains type
50 - 60 Hz
Max. input current
3.4A - 1.5A
Inrush current
< 14A cold start up @ 230V per unit, < 5ms
Network connection
Type A device connected with a non-industrial IEC 60320 C14 compliant plug.
Earthing arrangement
TN/TT For Norway and only for this country, this device can be connected to an earthing arrangement of IT type for a voltage of 230V between phases.
Isolation class
I
Installation category
II
Overcurrent protection
Built-in protection, cannot be accessed or reset
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — General Device Specifications
for Base system with dual AC/DC PSU or AC/AC PSU
Table A-2. AC Power Supply specifications (per unit) for Base system with dual AC/DC PSU or AC/AC PSU - CP6000
Standards
Title
Mains voltage
100 - 240 VAC (one range with no switching).
Mains type
50 - 60 Hz
Max. input current. (in normal mode)
1.75A - 0.75A (with two PSUs operating in the same chassis).
Max. input current. (in default mode)
3.4A - 1.5A for a single PSU in operation (if one PSU is faulty)
Inrush current
< 14A cold start up @ 230V per unit, < 5ms
Network connection
Type A device connected with a non-industrial CEI 60320 compliant plug.
Earthing arrangement
TN/TT For Norway and only for this country, this device can be connected to an earthing arrangement of IT type for a voltage of 230V between phases.
Isolation class
I
Installation category
II
Overcurrent protection
Built-in protection, cannot be accessed or reset
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
307
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — General Device Specifications
DC Power Supply
for Base system with single DC PSU
Table A-3. DC Power Supply specifications for Base system with single DC PSU - CP6000
Standards
Title
Input voltage
48 VDC + 20% - 15%
Current type
DC supply
Max. input current
9A - 5.6A
Network connection
Male/female 3-pin SubD connector.
Earthing arrangement
DCI system (DC return isolated).
Isolation class
I
DC network
ETS 300132-2, September 1996
Overcurrent protection
Built-in protection, cannot be accessed or reset
for Base system with dual AC/DC PSU or DC/DC PSU
Table A-4. DC Power Supply specifications (per unit) for Base system with dual AC/DC PSU or DC/DC PSU - CP6000
Standards
308
Title
Input voltage
48 VDC + 20% - 15%
Current type
DC supply
Max. input current (in normal mode)
3.75A - 2.6A per PSU (with two PSUs operating in the same chassis)
Max. input current (in default mode)
9A - 5.6A for a single PSU in operation (if one PSU is faulty)
Network connection
Male/female 3-pin SubD connector.
Earthing arrangement
DCI system (DC return isolated).
Isolation class
I
DC network
ETS 300132-2, September 1996
Overcurrent protection
Built-in protection, cannot be accessed or reset
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — General Device Specifications
Power supply - ViBE CP6100 AC Power Supply) Table A-5. AC Power Supply specifications - CP6100
Standards
Title
Mains voltage
100 - 240 VAC (one range with no switching).
Mains type
50 - 60 Hz
Max. input current
1.5A - 0.9A
Inrush current
< 14A cold start up @ 230V per unit, < 5ms
Network connection
Type A device connected with a non-industrial CEI 60320 compliant plug.
Earthing arrangement
TN/TT For Norway and only for this country, this device can be connected to an earthing arrangement of IT type for a voltage of 230V between phases.
Isolation class
I
Installation category
II
Overcurrent protection
Built-in protection, cannot be accessed or reset.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
309
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — General Device Specifications
Power Consumption
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 chassis are designed to operate at high power to account for future upgrades. The maximum power required is:
CP6000 chassis: 340 W (primary at 240VAC) or 325 W (primary at 48VDC)
CP6100 chassis: 150 W (primary at 240VAC)
The maximum power required (primary) for the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 depends on the chassis configuration:
Table A-6. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Power Consumption
Power Consumption (at 240VAC and 20°C)
Power Consumption (at 48VDC and 20°C)
CP6000 without MPEG or Modulator board
50 W (170 BTU/hour)
30 W (102 BTU/hour)
CP6100 without MPEG or Modulator board
50 W (170 BTU/hour)
One MPEG board
50 W (170 BTU/hour)
50W (170 BTU/hour)
One Modulator board
25 W (85 BTU/hour)
25W (85 BTU/hour)
CP6000 fully equipped with 4 MPEG boards
250 W (852 BTU/hour)
230 W (784 BTU/hour)
CP6000 fully equipped with 2 MPEG boards
150 W (852 BTU/hour)
Item
If a ViBE CP6000 is equipped with 2 power supplies, the required power is divided between the 2 power supplies.
310
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — General Device Specifications
Mechanical Features Dimensions ViBE CP6000 ViBE CP6000 1st version
The first version of the ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform is a 1RU/19” device with the following specific Height/Width/Depth dimensions:
44.2 mm/440.4 mm/501.6 mm (+ 38.6 mm for front panel)
1.74”/17.34”/19.74” (+ 1.52” for front panel)
Figure A-1. ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform dimensions, 1st version
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
311
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — General Device Specifications
ViBE CP6000 2nd version
The second version of the ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform is a 1RU/19” device with the following specific Height/Width/Depth dimensions:
44 mm/440.4 mm/492 mm (+ 38.6 mm for front panel)
1.74”/17.34”/19.74” (+ 1.52” for front panel)
Figure A-2. ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform dimensions, 2nd version
440,4
Thread M4 depht 6mm max.
134
44,1
32,9
44
34
38,6
224 35,2
303,5
492
36
483
312
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — General Device Specifications
ViBE CP6100 The ViBE CP6100 Contribution Platform is a 1RU/½ 19” width device with the following specific Height/Width/Depth dimensions:
44 mm/223 mm/416 mm
1.73”/8.77”/16.38”
Figure A-3. ViBE CP6100 Contribution Platform dimensions
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
313
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — General Device Specifications
Weight Table A-7. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform weight
Weight (Kg) per unit
Item CP6000 Base system (with no MPEG or Modulator board) CP6000-1U-AC (single PS 110-220 VAC) CP6000-1U-2AC (dual PS 110-220 VAC) CP6000-1U-1DC (single PS 48 VDC) CP6000-1U-2DC (dual PS 48 VDC) CP6000-1U-ACDC (dual PS 110-220 VAC/48 VDC)
6.4 kg (14.10 lbs) 6.9 kg (15.22 lbs) 6.4 kg (14.10 lbs) 6.9 kg (15.22 lbs) 6.9 kg (15.22 lbs)
CP6100 Base system (with no MPEG or Modulator board) CP6100-HU-AC
3.35 kg (7.4 lbs)
MPEG board
0.35 kg (0.77 lbs)
Modulator board
0.4 kg (1.10 lbs)
Blank panel (mask plate)
0.1 kg (0.22 lbs)
List of accessories delivered with the device Cardboard packing box + CD-ROM + Quick Start guide One Power cable if any
2.97 kg (6.55 lbs) 0.15 kg (0.33 lbs)
Example: the weight of a fully equipped platform CP6000-1U-2AC + 4 MPEG boards in its cartoon packing box + accessories + 2 cables is 11.6 kg (25.6 lbs).
Miscellaneous MPEG and Modulator boards are hot pluggable.
314
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — General Device Specifications
Ventilation CP6000 Table A-8. ViBE CP6000 Platform ventilation
Built-in ventilation system
Description and Value
Ventilation
Air circulated from right to left (as seen from front)
Ventilated air flow
80 to 160 m3/h according to the ambient temperature (and also the number of boards)
Figure A-4. ViBE CP6000 - Cooling air flow
Air in
Air out
CP6100 Table A-9. ViBE CP6100 Contribution Platform ventilation
Built-in ventilation system
Description and Value
Ventilation
Air circulated from front to rear
Ventilated air flow
36 m3/h max according to the ambient temperature (and also the number of boards)
Figure A-5. ViBE CP6100 - Cooling air flow
Air out
Air in
Certain precautions should be observed when mounting the device in a rack. Refer to section ’Mounting in Rack’ on page 32.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
315
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — General Device Specifications
Reliability FIT and MTBF stand for "Failures In Time" and "Mean Time Between Failures" respectively. Table A-10. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform FIT and MTBF
30°C (86°F) Item
MTBF (hours)
FIT CP6000 Base system fully equipped with 4 MPEG boards CP6000-1U-AC (single PS 110-220 VAC) CP6000-1U-2AC (dual PS 110-220 VAC) CP6000-1U-DC (single PS 48 VDC) CP6000-1U-2DC (dual PS 48 VDC) CP6000-1U-ACDC (dual PS 110-220 VAC/48 VDC)
40°C (104°F) MTBF (hours)
FIT
13753
72714
16285
61370
13236
75551
15778
63379
17203
58129
19745
50646
15536
64365
18078
55315
13647
73278
16189
61772
CP6100 Base system fully equipped with 2 MPEG boards CP6100-HU-AC (single PS 110-220 VAC)
8053
124185
9507
105191
MPEG board
2471
404694
2985
335008
Modulator board
4000
250000
CP6000 / CP6100 Boot phase duration After Power ON or Reboot via the Web Browser, the duration of the CP6000 / CP6100 boot phase is 2 min. 40 s. After Reboot via the Web Browser, the duration of an MPEG board boot phase is 1 min. 10 s.
316
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Chassis Specifications
Chassis Specifications CP6000 Chassis The ViBE CP6000 chassis is composed of:
1 fixed PSU or 2 fixed PSU mounted for 1 + 1 redundancy, with diodes, not hot swappable. Each PSU has an attached fan and an attached power inlet. When two PSUs are present, they share the overall chassis consumption in normal mode. If one PSU fails, the other will supply the whole chassis.
4 slots that can contain MPEG or Modulator boards.
1 backplane compatible with AMC standard.
A front panel with LCD and keypad.
A not extractable Manager board equipped with 2 Ethernet Ports, 1 Control Command port, 1 Sync interface, 1 GPIO interface and 1 terminal interface.
A fan unit.
CP6100 Chassis The ViBE CP6100 chassis is composed of:
1 fixed, non-hot swap PSU.
2 slots that can contain MPEG or Modulator boards (1 Modulator board max per chassis).
1 backplane compatible with AMC standard.
A front panel with LCD and keypad.
A not extractable Manager board equipped with 1 Control Command port and 1 terminal interface.
A fan unit.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
317
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Manager Board Specifications
Manager Board Specifications Processing
The Manager board provides Configuration, Monitoring and Diagnostics through:
Web GUI for configuration management and current state browsing (ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms host a Web server)
MediaFlexSUITE management
SNMP agent for alarm, statistics & monitoring collection, and alarm traps. SNMP supported protocol version is V2c
Command Line Interface (CLI) accessible via a terminal port or Telnet for configuration and current state browsing and debugging
The Manager board manages the MPEG and Modulator boards:
It detects occupied slots.
It detects MPEG or Modulator board plug in. Board plug in is dynamically managed: detection does not require a product reboot.
It enables board power up then loads the board specific code containing the board management resource and Encoder or Decoder application.
The Manager board manages the IP datagrams (ViBE CP6000 only):
It aggregates the IP datagrams coming from each processing modules.
It distributes the IP datagrams requested by each processing modules. Use of the LAN 1/LAN 2 interfaces of an MPEG board and the Ethernet interfaces of the Manager board is exclusive. LAN1/LAN2 interfaces can also be used to process TS over IP and to Control & Command the device from the same port.
318
The Manager board stores Configuration, log and firmware files. Up to 16 configurations can be stored in the Manager board.
The Manager board stores alarms in a database. Up to 2000 alarms can be stored in the Manager board. The alarms can be Active alarms or Closed alarms.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Manager Board Specifications
Interfaces Table A-11. Manager board connectors and LEDs
Connector
Description
CP6000 Manager board Interfaces (1st version) SYN
PPS
TERM
CP6100 Manager board Interfaces
C&C
LEDs
LED
C&C TER SYN
PPS
LAN 1
LAN 1
LAN 2
GPIO
GPIO
LAN 2
C&C
Term
CP6000 Manager board Interfaces (2nd version) GPIO
SYNC
GPIO
STAT LAN 1
LAN 2
SYNC
STAT
C&C
TER
LAN 1
LAN 2
TERM
C&C
Chassis LEDs (CP6000 1st version)
Green LED on: There is no chassis alarm. Red LED on: There is at least one critical or major alarm. Green LED off and Red LED off: The chassis is not powered. Blue LED on: The chassis is rebooting.
Chassis STAT (status) (CP6000 2nd version)
Green: There is no chassis alarm. Red: There is at least one critical or major alarm. Orange: The chassis is rebooting.
SYN
Reference input for synchronization (Genlock). The signal is common to the device. Genlock signal could be: SD: NTSC or PAL black burst as per ITU-R BT1700. HD Tri-Level Sync as per SMPTE-274M for 1080 and as per SMPTE-296M for 720.
(CP6000, 1st version)
SYNC (CP6000, 2nd version)
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Reference input/output for synchronization (Genlock). The signal is common to the device. A 75 ohms termination must be connected at the end of the Genlock signal distribution chain. Genlock signal could be: SD: NTSC or PAL black burst as per ITU-R BT1700. HD Tri-Level Sync as per SMPTE-274M for 1080 and as per SMPTE-296M for 720.
319
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Manager Board Specifications
Table A-11. Manager board connectors and LEDs
Connector
Description
PPS (CP6000, 1st version)
Pulse Per Second input for connecting a GPS receiver. This feature is not supported in the current release (v04.10).
TER (CP6000 1st and 2nd versions & CP6100)
Maintenance port (for qualified service personnel only).
C&C (Control & Command) (CP6000 1st and 2nd versions & CP6100)
Purpose: Ethernet link for device Configuration, Monitoring and Diagnostics. Features: Type: IEEE 802.3 1000-BaseT Connector: RJ45 Pinout:
Pin number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Name TDP (Transmitted Data +) TDN (Transmitted Data -) RDP (Received Data +) Not connected Not connected RDN (Received Data -) Not connected Not connected
Transmit LED (Yellow) Yellow solid Link/Activity LED (Green/Orange)
Status Transmit (Tx) on Status
Off No link Green solid 1000Mbps - No Activity Green blinking 1000Mbps - Activity Orange solid 100Mbps - No Activity Orange blinking 100Mbps - Activity Mixed Green/Orange solid 10Mbps - No Activity Mixed Green/Orange 10Mbps - Activity blinking
320
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Manager Board Specifications
Table A-11. Manager board connectors and LEDs
Connector LAN 1 and LAN 2 (CP6000 1st and 2nd versions)
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Description Purpose: Electrical Gigabit Ethernet interface for MPEG compressed stream input / output over IP. Pinout and LEDs: Refer to Table A-11 ’Manager board connectors and LEDs’ on page 319. Characteristics: Standard: 1 Gbps Operating mode: Half/Full (autonegotiation) Auto-crossover mechanism Input Impedance: 110 Cabling: 2 twisted pairs, category STP5 or FTP5, AWG gauge 24, shielded cable EMC and security: according to IEEE 802.3-2002 Permissible output jitter: according to IEEE 802.3-2002 Input jitter tolerance: according to IEEE 802.3-2002 IP Adaptation MAC Layer: Compliant with IEEE 802.3-2002 Unicast and Multicast transfer modes Protocol: IPv4 Destination IP @ can be statically set by the User Routing: One default gateway and four static routes can be set Encapsulation - MPEG/UDP/IP or MPEG/RTP/UDP/IP - From 1 to 7 MPEG packets per IP frame - Compliant with SMPTE 2022-2 VLAN tagging management - VLAN tag compliant with IEEE 802.1q - VLAN Id value: 50 to 4094 - Up to 16 VLANs per board FEC Forward Error Correction for transmission reliability (FEC compliant with SMPTE 2022-1, FEC type Annex B). 2 FEC configuration modes are available: - Basic mode with 3 protection profiles: - Low: correction of 5 consecutive lost IP frames. 1D column FEC L = 5, D = 20, interleaving = 20. Overhead = 1/D = 5% - Medium: correction of 10 consecutive lost IP frames. 1D column FEC L = 10, D = 10, interleaving = 10. Overhead = 1/D = 10% - High: correction of 20 consecutive lost IP frames. 1D 1D column FEC L = 20, D = 5, interleaving = 5. Overhead = 1/D = 20% - Expert mode: The User can set the L and D Latency: Refer to section ’IP Network Adaptation Latency’ on page 336.
321
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Manager Board Specifications
Table A-11. Manager board connectors and LEDs
Connector
GPIO (CP6000 1st and 2nd versions)
Description Purpose: GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output) connector. Connector: MICROFIT MOLEX RIGHT ANGLE 43045-1200 Pinout:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12
Refer to Figure ’Interfaces’ on page 319. Pin Name Characteristics number 1 BS Common 2 BS Relay Inactive Switched: 24 VDC or 24 VAC (110 VDC, 125 VAC max) 0.5 A (1 A max) 3 GPOUT_1 Output High voltage: 3.3 V Output Low voltage: 0.1 V 4 GPIN_2 Input Low voltage: 1.1 V Input High voltage: 5 V Max input voltage: 12 V 5 GPIN_0 Refer to GPIN_2 6 GND 7 BS Relay Active Switched: 24VDC or 24VAC (110VDC, 125VAC max) 0.5 A (1A max) 8 GPOUT_0 Refer to GPOUT_1 9 GPIN_3 Refer to GPIN_2 10 GPIN_1 Refer to GPIN_2 11 P3V3_Out or Max: 500mA P12V Out Max: 200mA 12 GND
322
Alarm signaling: BS Relay Active activated indicates Critical alarms GPOUT_0 activated indicates Major alarms GPOUT_1 activated indicates Minor alarms or a warning
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Manager Board Specifications
Figure A-6. CP6000 - GPIO Interface diagram
GPO_ALIM 3V3_12V Software CDE
+
1
-
8
4 7
6
GPIO Connector
P3V3
0.5A
2
3V
3
P3V3
REVISION=A
5
SOP6-600-1
P3V3
P12V
REVISION=A
P3V3
CDE_GP_OUT1
REVISION=A
332
S
REVISION=A
1
6
2
5
220
12 REVISION=A
0.2A
REVISION=A
SOIC8
REVISION=A
7
F720
1 REVISION=A
OPTO1
220
REVISION=A
P3V3
CDE_GP_OUT0
REVISION=A
332
2
5
3
4
SOIC8
4
6 5
F725
3 REVISION=A
220
REVISION=A
BS_RELAY_INACTIVE BS_RELAY_ACTIVE
P3V3 REVISION=A
470
4.7K
BS_COMMON
REVISION=A
P3V3
+ 3V
3 1K 1%
ILD223
REVISION=A
SOIC8
7
F730
1 REVISION=A
220
REVISION=A
1%
5 10 4 9 3 8 2 7
-
1
8 2 4 7
6
5
0.5A
2
8
OUT
GP_OUT0
GP_IN1
1
REVISION=A
GP_IN3 GP_OUT1
0.2A
REVISION=A
400PF 14V
GPIO_GP_IN2
0.2A
GP_IN2
11
REVISION=A
OPTO1
REVISION=A
6
REVISION=A
OUT
220
REVISION=A
ILD223
REVISION=A
REVISION=A
6
GP_IN1
REVISION=A
GPIO_GP_IN1
S
1
CDE_BS
GP_IN0 P3V3
SOP6-600-1
P3V3
GP_IN0
0.2A
REVISION=A
400PF 14V
1K 1%
4 REVISION=A
2
8
OUT
3
0.2A
ILD223
REVISION=A
GPIO_GP_IN0
1K 1%
GPO_ALIM
REVISION=A
GP_IN2
0.2A 400PF 14V
REVISION=A
REVISION=A
P3V3
GPIO_GP_IN3 OUT
1K 1%
ILD223
SOIC8
REVISION=A
4
6 5
F735
3 REVISION=A
220
REVISION=A
GP_IN3
0.2A 400PF 14V
REVISION=A
REVISION=A
TS over IP and Control Command on Same Port LAN 1 and LAN 2 interfaces can be used to carry the TS signal and control the equipment at the same time. In this case TS over IP and C&C share the same link but C&C is not included in the TS. Figure A-7. CP6000 - TS Over IP and Control Command on Same Port configuration
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
323
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Manager Board Specifications
License management Licensing is based on the codec used.
If an application focuses on MPEG-2 SD 4:2:0, it will require the corresponding license (at least CP6x00-LIC-ENC-MP2SD-420 license for the encoder and CP6x00-LIC-DEC-MP2SD-420 license for the decoder)
If an application focuses on MPEG-4 SD 4:2:2, it will require the corresponding license (at least CP6x00-LIC-ENC-MP4SD-422 license for the encoder and CP6x00-LIC-DEC-MP4SD-422 license for the decoder)
A license can include several Formats / Standards / Video profiles as indicated in the table below: Table A-12. Profiles inclusion where xxx= ENC for encoder and DEC for decoder Formats, Standards & Video Profiles
Code
MPEG-2 SD 4:2:0
MPEG-4 AVC HD
4:2:2
4:2:0
SD 4:2:2
4:2:0 8 bits
HD 4:2:2 8 bits
4:2:0 8 bits
4:2:2 8 bits
CP6x00-LIC-xxx-MP2SD-420
X
CP6x00-LIC-xxx-MP2SD-422
X
CP6x00-LIC-xxx-MP2HD-420
X
CP6x00-LIC-xxx-MP2HD-422
X
CP6x00-LIC-xxx-MP4SD-420
X
CP6x00-LIC-xxx-MP4SD-422
X
CP6x00-LIC-xxx-MP4HD-420
X
CP6x00-LIC-xxx-MP4HD-8b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
CP6x00-LIC-xxx-MP4HD-10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4:2:2 10 bits
X X X
X
X X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
This means that if an application focuses on MPEG-4 SD 4:2:2 8 bits at a given time and MPEG-4 HD 4:2:2 8 bits at another time, only CP6x00-LIC-ENC-MP4HD-8b license for the encoder and CP6x00-LIC-DEC-MP4HD-8b license for the decoder will be required to satisfy both needs (at different times).
324
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Manager Board Specifications
Licenses are managed as a collection attached to the rack. License is dynamically allocated to a particular channel when an MPEG board is configured. This license management method allows having a low spare cost, because of licenses are not attached to the spare boards. Coupled with the unique type of board, it allows to have a very flexible equipment. Each MPEG board can be configured as an encoder or a decoder at runtime. The requested licenses are allocated according to the configuration. They are attached to the slots the MPEG boards are attached to and not to the MPEG boards themselves. Figure A-8. License management - Licenses are managed as a collection attached to the rack.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
325
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Manager Board Specifications
The diagram below shows a ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform used for 3 encoding channels and 1 decoding channel. The rack includes 3 MPEG boards without audio interface.
Each of the two first encoders (in the first MPEG board) encodes two MPEG-1 Layer II stereo channels. Two MPEG-1 Layer II or AAC/HE-AAC stereo audios licenses are included in each video license.
The third encoder in the second MPEG board encodes 4 audio MPEG-1 Layer II stereo channels. It requires two additional audio stereo licenses.
The decoder in the third MPEG board is using the MPEG-4 SD 4:2:0 decoding license so the MPEG-4 SD/HD decoding license is not used in this example.
Figure A-9. License management - Example .
326
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Encoder Specifications
MPEG Encoder Specifications An MPEG Encoder is the combination of one MPEG board and one encoding software. There are 2 types of MPEG board:
The Dual Channels MPEG board: This MPEG board can encode up to 2 channels SD or HD.
The Single Channel MPEG board: This MPEG board can encode 1 channel SD or HD. It is fitted with an audio connector.
Encoder Block Diagram Dual Channels MPEG Encoder Board A Dual Channels MPEG Encoder board is fitted with 5 IO interfaces (IO1 to IO5) and 2 LAN interfaces. The IO1 and IO3 interfaces are the nominal inputs of the encoding channel 1 and channel 2. The IO2 and IO4 interfaces can be configured as SDI backup inputs of the encoding channel 1 and channel 2 or as ASI outputs. The IO5 interface can be configured as ASI output or as ASI input (ASI to IP gateway feature). ASI outputs are not assigned to a dedicated encoding channel. SPTS or MPTS can be delivered on those outputs. The LAN1 and LAN2 interfaces are the IP outputs of the encoding channel 1 and channel 2. Figure A-10. Dual Channels MPEG Encoder board block diagram
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
327
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Encoder Specifications
Single Channel MPEG Encoder Board A Single Channel MPEG Encoder board is fitted with 3 IO interfaces (IO1, IO2 and IO5), 1 audio interface and 2 LAN interfaces. The IO1 interface is the nominal input of the encoding channel. The IO2 interface can be configured as SDI backup input of the encoding channel or as ASI output. The IO5 interface is can be configured as ASI output or ASI input (ASI to IP gateway feature). The audio interface can be configured as analog or digital audio inputs. The LAN1 and LAN2 interfaces are the IP outputs of the encoding channel. Figure A-11. Single Channel MPEG Encoder board block diagram
328
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Encoder Specifications
Interface Specifications Table A-13. MPEG Encoder board interface specifications
Connector
Description Dual channels MPEG board LAN 1
MPEG
IO1 SDI input main
IO2
SDI input backup or ASI output
Encoder 1
IO3 SDI input main
IO4
SDI input backup or ASI output
LAN 2
IO5 Ethernet 1 output
ASI input or ASI output
Ethernet 2 output
Encoder 2
Single channel MPEG board LAN 1
Audio
MPEG
IO1 Audio inputs
LED
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
SDI input main
IO2
SDI input backup or ASI output
LAN 2
IO5 ASI input or ASI output
Ethernet 1 output
Ethernet 2 output
Red LED on: The board is powered up and there is at least one board alarm. Red LED off: The board is not powered or there is no board alarm.
329
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Encoder Specifications
Table A-13. MPEG Encoder board interface specifications
Connector Single channel MPEG board: Audio
Description
Purpose: Analog or digital audio inputs Connector: SUBD-HD26 female Pinout:
Digital mode Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
Clock GND
10 Clock Out
2
AES4 Out -
11 AES4 Out +
3
AES3 Out GND 12 AES3 Out -
4
AES2 Out -
5
AES1 Out GND 14 AES1 Out -
6
AES4 In -
15 AES4 In +
23 AES4 In GND
7
AES3 In GND
16 AES3 In -
24 AES3 In +
8
AES2 In -
17 AES2 In +
25 AES2 In GND
9
AES1 In GND
18 AES1 In -
26 AES1 In +
13 AES2 Out +
19 AES4 Out GND 20 AES3 Out + 21 AES2 Out GND 22 AES1 Out +
Note: The shaded pins are not used in encoder mode. Analog mode Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal Clock GND Right Ch2 Out Left Ch2 Out GND Right Ch1 Out Left Ch1 Out GND Right Ch2 In Left Ch2 In GND Right Ch1 In Left Ch1 In GND
Pin
Signal
10 Clock Out Right Ch2 11 Out + Left Ch2 12 Out Right Ch1 13 Out + Left Ch1 14 Out Right Ch2 15 In + Left Ch2 16 In Right Ch1 17 In + Left Ch1 18 In -
Pin
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Signal Right Ch2 Out GND Left Ch2 Out + Right Ch1 Out GND Left Ch1 Out + Right Ch2 In GND Left Ch2 In + Right Ch1 In GND Left Ch1 In +
Note: The shaded pins are not used in encoder mode. A breakout cable can be fitted as an option. Refer to section ’Audio Breakout Cable’ on page 402.
330
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Encoder Specifications
Table A-13. MPEG Encoder board interface specifications
Connector Single channel MPEG board: Audio (continued)
Description
Specifications:
In Digital mode
4 balanced AES inputs: Digital audio input signal: AES-2003, Tech 3250-E Input impedance: 110 ± 20% Input return loss: > 20 dB (100 kHz-128FS) Differential voltage range: 200 mV to 10 V p to p Commons mode range: ± 10 V, 50 to 20 kHz Supported frequency: 32, 44.1, 48, 96 kHz Supported sample width: 16, 20, 24 bits 1 AES/EBU (48 kHz) output for synchronizing an external audio encoder
In Analog mode
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
2 balanced analog stereo inputs: Analog Audio input - Input impedance: > 22 k ± 20% - Level for full-scale output: 0 to + 24 dBu adjustable in 1 dBu step - Common mode input voltage: 20 V max - Differential DC: 0.25 V max - Common mode rejection ratio: > 72 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz Analog Audio input conversion performance - Sampling rate: 48 kHz synchronized with the video clock - Signal to noise ratio: > 102 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz, > 105 dB «A» weighted @ 24 dBu - THD + noise: < -75 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz - Inter channel crosstalk: < -95 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz - Inter channel gain mismatch: < 0.2 dB - Inter channel phase mismatch: < 1° - Inter modulation distortion: < -100 dB CCIF two-tone test, 19 & 20 kHz tones - Frequency response: ± 0.1 dB relative to 1 kHz, 20 Hz to 20 kHz - DC offset: ± 1 mV - Emphasis: No pre-emphasis or de-emphasis - Output resolution: 20 bits - Effective number of bits: 17 bits
331
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Encoder Specifications
Table A-13. MPEG Encoder board interface specifications
Connector Dual channels MPEG board: IO1 - IO3 Single channel MPEG board: IO1 only
Description
332
Purpose: SDI/SD-SDI/HD main inputs for each encoding channel: IO1 : Nominal input for encoding channel 1 IO3 : Nominal input for encoding channel 2 Characteristics: Connector: BNC 75 Standard compliance: SMPTE 259M/292M/424M/272M/ITU-BT-601 Input signal level: 800 mVp-p ± 10% max Return loss: -17 dB from 5 MHz to 1.5 GHz and -13 dB from 1.5 GHz to 3.0 GHz Tolerated input jitter: Compliant with SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 292M and DVB ASI The SDI input interface supports the following cable length depending of the input format 380 m of Belden 1694A cable for SD-SDI (270Mb/s) 180 m of Belden 1694A cable for HD-SDI (1.5Gb/s) 120 m of Belden 1694A cable for HD-SDI (3.0 Gb/s)
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Encoder Specifications
Table A-13. MPEG Encoder board interface specifications
Connector Dual channels MPEG board: IO2 - IO4
Description
Single channel MPEG board: IO2 only
IO connectors configured as SDI inputs: Purpose: SDI/SD-SDI/HD backup inputs for each encoding channel: - IO2 : Backup input for encoding channel 1 - IO4 : Backup input for encoding channel 2 Characteristics: - Connector: BNC 75 - Standard compliance: SMPTE 259M/292M/424M/272M/ITU-BT-601 - Input signal level: 800 mVp-p ± 10% max - Return loss: -17 dB from 5 MHz to 1.5 GHz and -13 dB from 1.5 GHz to 3.0 GHz - Tolerated input jitter: Compliant with SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 292M and DVB ASI The SDI input interface supports the following cable length depending of the input format - 380 m of Belden 1694A cable for SD-SDI (270 Mb/s) - 180 m of Belden 1694A cable for HD-SDI (1.5 Gb/s) - 120 m of Belden 1694A cable for HD-SDI (3.0 Gb/s) IO connectors configured as ASI outputs: Purpose: IO2 and IO4 provide the encoded TS from channels 1 and 2. Characteristics: - Connector : Female 75BNC - TS output compliant with CENELEC EN 50083-9 (DVB PI) - ASI Bitrate : 270 Mbit/s - TS bitrate: 213 Mbit/s max - MPEG format: SPTS or MPTS - TS packet size: 188 or 204 (188 + 16) bytes - Mode: Data burst or Data packet IO2 and IO4 can not be configured as ASI outputs if the SDI Input Redundancy feature is used. Refer to section ’SDI input redundancy’ on page 349.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
333
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Encoder Specifications
Table A-13. MPEG Encoder board interface specifications
Connector Dual channels MPEG board and Single channel MPEG board: IO5
Description Purpose: IO5 provides the encoded TS. Characteristics: Connector: Female 75BNC TS output compliant with CENELEC EN 50083-9 (DVB PI) ASI bitrate: 270 Mbit/s TS bitrate: 213 Mbit/s max MPEG format: SPTS or MPTS TS packet size: 188 or 204 (188 + 16) bytes Mode: Data burst or Data packet
- IO5 can be used as ASI input to add an external component to a service. Refer to section ’ASI Input for external components’ on page 351. - If the ASI to IP gateway optional feature is used, IO5 is the ASI input. Refer to section ’ASI to IP Gateway’ on page 352.
334
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Encoder Specifications
Table A-13. MPEG Encoder board interface specifications
Connector LAN 1 and LAN 2
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Description Purpose: Electrical Gigabit Ethernet interface for MPEG compressed stream output over IP which can be an SPTS or MPTS. Both LAN are active simultaneously. The IP streams of the MPEG board can be routed to the LAN 1/LAN 2 interfaces of the Manager board. The use of the LAN 1/LAN 2 interfaces of the MPEG board and the LAN interfaces of the Manager board is exclusive. Pinout and LEDs: Refer to Table A-11 ’Manager board connectors and LEDs’ on page 319. Characteristics: Standard: 100/1000 Mbps (autosensing) Operating mode: Half/Full (autonegotiation) Auto-crossover mechanism Input Impedance: 110 Cabling: 2 twisted pairs, category STP5 or FTP5, AWG gauge 24, shielded cable EMC and security: according to IEEE 802.3-2002 Permissible output jitter: according to IEEE 802.3-2002 Input jitter tolerance: according to IEEE 802.3-2002 IP Adaptation MAC Layer: Compliant with IEEE 802.3-2002 Unicast and Multicast transfer modes Protocol: IPv4 Destination IP @ can be statically set by the User Routing: One default gateway and four static routes can be set Encapsulation - MPEG/UDP/IP or MPEG/RTP/UDP/IP. - From 1 to 7 MPEG packets per IP frame - Compliant with SMPTE 2022-2 VLAN tagging management - VLAN tag compliant with IEEE 802.1q - VLAN Id value: 50 to 4094 - Up to 4 VLANs (1 per IP Tx) per board FEC Forward Error Correction for transmission reliability (FEC compliant with SMPTE 2022-1, FEC type Annex B). 2 FEC configuration modes are available: - Basic mode with 3 protection profiles: - Low: Correction of 5 consecutive lost IP frames. 1D column FEC L = 5, D = 20, interleaving = 20. Overhead = 1/D = 5% - Medium: Correction of 10 consecutive lost IP frames. 1D column FEC L = 10, D = 10, interleaving = 10. Overhead = 1/D = 10% - High: Correction of 20 consecutive lost IP frames. FEC 1D column FEC L = 20, D = 5, interleaving = 5. Overhead = 1/D = 20% - Expert mode: The User can set the L and D values Latency: Refer to section ’IP Network Adaptation Latency’ on page 336.
335
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Encoder Specifications
IP Network Adaptation Latency Sources of latency are:
FEC calculation delay in transmitter
Reordering
FEC packet loss recovery
Jitter absorption delay
End-to-end delay introduced by FEC processing The end-to-end delay introduced by FEC processing (including reordering) varies with TS rate. When the frame size is set to n packets/frame, the time delay (expressed in milliseconds) is:
32 + 2LD n 188 8 EndtoEndDelayForFEC = --------------------------------------------------------------------- TSRateInKbitPerSecond L is the number of columns and D is the number of rows of the FEC matrix. Delay introduced by reordering The equivalent delay when not using FEC processing only includes reordering: R frames (where R = 10 in the CP6000). When the frame size is set to n packets/frame, this produces a time delay (expressed in milliseconds) of:
R n 188 8 DelayForReordering = --------------------------------------------------------------------- TSRateInKbitPerSecond Delay introduced by jitter absorption The delay introduced by jitter absorption does not change with TS rate. IPDVInMilliseconds is the IP absorption buffer. Delay introduced by jitter absorption (expressed in milliseconds) is:
8 IPDVInMilliseconds DelayForJitterAbsorption = ---------------------------------------------------------------- + 3milli sec onds 7 Total end-to-end delay The total end-to-end delay is equal to
336
EndtoEndDelayForFEC processing is enabled.
DelayForReordering + DelayForJitterAbsorption when FEC processing is disabled.
+
DelayForJitterAbsorption
when
FEC
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Encoder Specifications
1st Example: End-to-End Delay with FEC processing Tx + Rx where
Number of packets per IP Packet is n = 7
Number of rows in the FEC matrix is D = 10
Number of columns in the FEC matrix is L = 10
Transport Stream Bitrate is TSRateInKbitPerSecond = 40 000 kbps
IP absorption buffer is IPDVInMilliseconds = 20 ms
Reordering buffer size is R = 10 IP frames
32 + 2 10 10 7 188 8 EndtoEndDelayForFEC = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- = 61milli sec onds 40000 8 20 DelayForJitterAbsorption = --------------- + 3 = 26milli sec onds 7 The total end-to-end delay is equal to 61 ms + 26 ms = 87 ms 2nd Example: End-to-End Delay without FEC processing where
Number of packets per IP Packet is n = 7
Transport Stream Bitrate is TSRateInKbitPerSecond = 40 000 kbps
IP absorption buffer is IPDVInMilliseconds = 20 ms
Reordering buffer size is R = 10 IP frames
10 7 188 8 DelayForReordering = --------------------------------------- = 3milli sec onds 40000
8 20 DelayForJitterAbsorption = --------------- + 3 = 26milli sec onds 7
The total end-to-end delay is equal to 3 ms + 26 ms = 29 ms
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
337
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Encoder Specifications
MPEG system layer Table A-14. MPEG system layer specifications
Parameter System layer
Description
Additional service component formats (VBI, ANC data)
DVB compliant ETSI TS 101 154 v1.8.1
Signaling
DVB Signaling
MPEG TS number
Per MPEG encoder board Dual channels MPEG board: 1 MPTS (Channel 1 and Channel 2) and 2 SPTS (Channel 1 / Channel 2) Single channel MPEG board: 1 SPTS
MPEG TS bitrate
256 kbit/s to 400 Mbit/s per TS in 1 kbit/s increments. The bitrate can be set manually or computing automatically by the Encoder (s) or the Modulator connected to the TS.
Multiplexing
The following components are multiplexed: Video Audio VBI Signaling
Component PID allocation
PSI/SI rule compliant In compliance with WBU_ISOG recommendation, a PID is automatically allocated to a component by the encoder but it can be set manually.
Number of services and components generated
338
MPEG-4: ISO/IEC 13818-1 & Amendment 3: Transport of AVC video data over ITU-T Rec H.222.0 compliant MPEG-2: ISO/IEC 13818-1
Services: Up to 2 per encoding channel Video component: 1 per encoding channel Audio components: Up to 8 per encoding channel Ancillary component: Up to 2 per encoding channel VBI component (SD Video Encoding): Up to 4 per encoding channel
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Encoder Specifications
Video Processing Input video encoding formats Table A-15. Input video encoding formats
Frame Rate (Fps)
Vertical Resolution
Horizontal Resolution
25 / 29.97 / 30
1080i
1920
50 / 59.94 / 60
720p
1280
25
576i
720
29.97
480i
720
Horizontal Picture Rescaling The Horizontal Picture Rescaling feature is used to manage very low encoding rates. It consists of activating a low pass filter to reduce the number of active pixels per line according to the input format. Horizontal Picture Rescaling can be set by the User. Table A-16. Horizontal Picture Rescaling
Input Formats
Available Horizontal Resolutions
1920 x 1080i
1920, 1440, 1280, 960
1280 x 720p
1280, 960, 640
720 x 576i
720, 704, 640, 544, 528, 480, 352
720 x 480i
720, 704, 640, 544, 528, 480, 352
Picture Filtering The Picture Filtering feature is used to manage very low encoding rates. It consists of decreasing picture complexity by activating a filter to reduce the high frequency spatial texture. Picture Filtering can be set to None, Weak or Strong by the User.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
339
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Encoder Specifications
Video processing Table A-17. MPEG-2, Video Encoding Profiles /Levels
Video Format MPEG- 2 Profile
MPEG-2 SD
MPEG-2 HD
4:2:0, 8 bits, MP
MP@ML
MP@HL
4:2:0, 8 bits, HP
HP@ML
HP@HL
4:2:0, 8 bits, 422P
422P@ML
422P@HL
4:2:2, 8 bits, 422P
422P@ML
422P@HL
Table A-18. MPEG-4 (H264), Video Encoding Profiles /Levels
Video Format MPEG-4 (H264) Profile
340
MPEG-4 (H264) SD
MPEG-4 (H264) 720P
MPEG-4 (H264) 1080i
4:2:0, 8 bits, CBP
[email protected] (< 10 Mbit/s) [email protected] (> 10 Mbit/s, < 14 Mbit/s) [email protected] (> 14 Mbit/s, < 20 Mbit/s)
[email protected] (< 20 Mbit/s) [email protected] (> 20 Mbit/s, < 50 Mbits)
4:2:0, 8 bits, MP
[email protected] (< 10 Mbit/s) [email protected] (> 10 Mbit/s, < 14 Mbit/s) [email protected] (> 14 Mbit/s, < 20 Mbit/s)
[email protected] (< 20Mbit/s) [email protected] (> 20 Mbit/s, < 50 Mbits)
[email protected] ( 20 Mbits, < 50 Mbits)
4:2:0, 8 bits, HiP
[email protected] (< 12.5 Mbit/s) [email protected] (> 12.5 Mbit/s, < 17.5 Mbit/s) [email protected] (> 17.5 Mbit/s, < 25 Mbit/s)
[email protected] (< 25Mbit/s) [email protected] (> 25 Mbit/s, < 62.5 Mbits)
[email protected] ( 25 Mbits, < 62.5 Mbits)
4:2:0, 10 bits, Hi10P
[email protected] (< 30 Mbit/s) [email protected] (> 30 Mbit/s, 42 Mbit/s, 60 Mbit/s, < 80 Mbits)
[email protected] ( 60 Mbits, < 80 Mbits)
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Encoder Specifications
Table A-18. MPEG-4 (H264), Video Encoding Profiles /Levels
Video Format MPEG-4 (H264) Profile
MPEG-4 (H264) SD
MPEG-4 (H264) 720P
MPEG-4 (H264) 1080i
4:2:2, 8 bits, Hi422P
[email protected] ( 40 Mbit/s, < 56 Mbit/s) [email protected] (> 56 Mbit/s, 15 dB (100 kHz-128FS) Output resolution: 24 bits Differential voltage range: 3.4 V p to p ± 0.2 V @ 110 Sampling rate (FS): 48 kHz
In Analog mode
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
2 balanced analog stereo outputs: Analog Audio output - Output impedance: 100 ± 20% - Output signal level for full-scale output: + 4 to + 24 dBu adjustable in 1 dBu step - Drive capability maximum: + 24 dBu balanced @ 10K load - Differential DC: 0.25 V max Analog Audio output conversion performance - Sampling rate: 48 kHz synchronized with the video clock - Signal to noise ratio: > 102 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz, > 105 dB «A» weighted @ 24 dBu - Inter modulation distortion: < -80 dB CCIF two-tone test, 19 & 20 kHz tones - THD + noise: < -75 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz - Inter channel crosstalk: < -80 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz - Inter channel gain mismatch: < 0.2 dB - Inter channel phase mismatch: < 1° - Frequency response: ± 0.2 dB relative to 1 kHz, 20 Hz to 20 kHz - DC offset: ± 50 mV - Output resolution: 20 bits - Effective number of bits: 17 bits
363
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Decoder Specifications
Table A-30. MPEG Decoder board interface specifications
Connector Dual channels MPEG board: IO1 - IO3
Description
Single channel MPEG board: IO1 only
Dual channels MPEG board: IO2-IO4 Single channel MPEG board: IO2 only
IO connectors configured as ASI inputs: Purpose: MPEG compressed inputs to decoding channels 1 and 2 Characteristics: - Connector : Female 75BNC - TS input compliant with CENELEC EN 50083-9 (DVB PI) - Input signal level: 800 mVp-p ± 10% max - Return loss: -17 dB - Bitrate: 270 Mbit/s - TS bitrate: From 15 kbit/s to 213 Mbit/s - MPEG format: SPTS or MPTS - TS packet size: 18 or 204 (188 + 16) bytes with automatic detection - Mode: Data burst or Data packet - Tolerated input jitter: Compliant with SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 292M and DVB ASI IO connectors configured as SDI outputs: Purpose: SDI/SD-SDI/HD outputs for each decoding channel. - IO1: Output for decoding channel 1 (mirror IO2 below) - IO3: Output for decoding channel 2 (mirror IO4 below) Characteristics: - Connector: BNC 75 - Standard compliance: SMPTE 259M/292M/424M/272M/ITU-BT-601 Synchronization: Based on Genlock with Horizontal phase adjustment (+/- 32000 pixels)
Purpose: SDI/SD-SDI/HD outputs for each decoding channel: IO2: Output for decoding channel 1 IO4: Output for decoding channel 2 Characteristics: Connector: BNC 75 Standard compliance: SMPTE 259M/292M/424M/272M/ITU-BT-601 Synchronization: Based on Genlock with Horizontal phase
adjustment (+/- 32000 pixels)
364
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Decoder Specifications
Table A-30. MPEG Decoder board interface specifications
Connector Dual channels MPEG board and Single channel MPEG board: IO5
Description
IO connector configured as ASI input Purpose: MPEG compressed input to decoding channels 1 and 2 Characteristics: - Connector : Female 75BNC - TS input compliant with CENELEC EN 50083-9 (DVB PI). - Bitrate : 270 Mbit/s - TS bitrate: From 15 kbit/s to 213 Mbit/s - MPEG format: SPTS or MPTS - TS packet size: 18 or 204 (188 + 16) bytes with automatic detection - Mode : Data burst or Data packet. IO connector configured as ASI output Purpose: ASI output for MPEG compressed - Channel 1 or channel 2 encoded output Characteristics: - Connector : Female 75BNC - TS input compliant with CENELEC EN 50083-9 (DVB PI). - Bitrate : 270 Mbit/s - TS bitrate: 213 Mbit/s max - MPEG format: SPTS or MPTS If the IP to ASI gateway optional feature is used, IO5 is the ASI outputs. Refer to section ’IP to ASI Gateway’ on page 376.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
365
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Decoder Specifications
Table A-30. MPEG Decoder board interface specifications
Connector LAN 1 and LAN 2
366
Description Purpose: Electrical Gigabit Ethernet interface for MPEG (SPTS or MPTS) compressed A/V input over IP. LAN 1/LAN 2 interfaces of the Manager board can be used as MPEG over IP inputs. The use of the LAN 1/LAN 2 interfaces of the MPEG board and the LAN interfaces of the Manager board is exclusive. Pinout and LEDs: Refer to Table A-11 ’Manager board connectors and LEDs’ on page 319. Characteristics: Standard: 100/1000 Mbps (autosensing) Operating mode: Half/Full (autonegotiation) Auto-crossover mechanism Input Impedance: 110 Cabling: 2 twisted pairs, category STP5 or FTP5, AWG gauge 24, shielded cable EMC and security: according to IEEE 802.3-2002 Permissible output jitter: according to IEEE 802.3-2002 Input jitter tolerance: according to IEEE 802.3-2002 IP Adaptation: TS over UDP or RTP/UDP decapsulation 2 IP receive module per Ethernet interface (up to 4 TS streams on reception per MPEG decoder board) Unicast or Multicast modes IGMPv2, IGMPv3, IGMPv3 SSM (Source Specific Multicast, which is an IP technology where the destination host can select a source when joining a multicast group) VLAN tagging management - VLAN tag compliant with IEEE 802.1q - VLAN Id value: 50 to 4094 - Up to 4 VLAN (1 per IP Rx) can be configured per board FEC error correction ANNEX B with automatic FEC configuration Jitter: Advanced clock recovery to minimize the effects of IP jitter up to 200 ms
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Decoder Specifications
TS Processing Table A-31. MPEG Decoder board, TS Processing
Parameter TS number and processing
Description
Monitoring
Two TS IN per decoding channel to redundancy: SPTS or MPTS from Ethernet inputs or ASI inputs TS processing: MPEG-2 Transport Stream compliant with ISO/IEC 13818-1 TS with a bitrate of 400 Mbit/s max CBR TS SPTS or MPTS TS characteristics - Number of services per TS: up to 32 - Number of videos per service: up to 4 - Number of audios per service: up to 28 - Number of VBIs per service: up to 10
The services carried by the TS source are displayed. For each service, the service name, service Id, PMT PID and components with their PID are displayed. To allow downstream redundancy based on SDI presence, the SDI output signal can be disabled in the following cases:
Service Selection modes
The service to decode can be selected:
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
No Stream received Service name or service id missing Video PID missing
1st service in the PMT (default mode) In this mode the decoder automatically processes the first valid service containing a video component declared in the PAT. Other components contained in the service are processed. By Service name By Service Id By PID (the PID of each component must be indicated)
367
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Decoder Specifications
Video Processing Table A-32. MPEG Decoder board, Video Processing
Parameter
Description
Video decoding formats
The Decoder board supports the formats encoded by the CP6000 Encoder board. Refer to section ’Input video encoding formats’ on page 339.
Video decoding profile and bitrate
The Decoder board supports the profiles and bitrates encoded by the CP6000 Encoder board. Refer to section ’Video processing’ on page 340.
Video Rescaling The Decoder handles Upscaling, Progressive/Interlaced format conversion.
Downscaling
and
The following rescaling modes are supported: Table A-33. MPEG Decoder board, Video rescaling
Video Rescalinga HD to SD Downscaling b
1080i/25 to 576i/25 1080i/29.97 to 480i/29.97
SD to HD Upscaling
576i/25 to 1080i/25 480i/29.97 to 1080i/29.97
Progressive & Interlaced Conversion
HD to SD c
720p/50 to 576i/25 720p/59.94 to 480i/29.97
SD to HD
576i/25 to 720p/50 480i/29.97 to 720p/59.94
HD 1080i to HD 720p
1080i/25 to 720p/50 1080i/29.97 to 720p/59.94 1080i/30 to 720p/60
HD 720p to HD 1080i
720p/50 to 1080i/25 720p/59.94 to 1080i/29.97 720p/60 to 1080i/30
a
Frame rate conversion is not supported.
b
The 1080i/30 and 720p/60 standards are not supported.
c The
368
1080i/30 and 720p/60 standards are not supported.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Decoder Specifications
The following rescaling types are supported (AFD out values are indicated): Table A-34. MPEG Decoder board, Video Scaling types and AFD information
Source
4/3 display Scaling type and AFD information
16/9 display Scaling type and AFD information
16/9
Anamorphic
No change
AFD 4x3: 1000 Center cut
AFD 4x3: 1000 Letter box
AFD 4x3: 1010 4/3
No change
Anamorphic
AFD 16x9: 1000 Center cut
AFD 16x9: 1001 Pillar box
AFD 16x9: 1001
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
369
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Decoder Specifications
HD to SD down-conversion
Input / Output
Incoming TS includes: - HD video - Audio - HD teletext component - DVB subtitle
SDI output inserts: - SD video (HD video down converted) - Audio - SD Teletext in VBI (HD teletext down converted) - AFD, WSS in VBI
Figure A-22. HD to SD down -conversion
370
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Decoder Specifications
User commands The following commands can be set by the User:
Figure A-23. HD to SD down -conversion, User commands
Video rescaling and WSS generation
Video output rescaling is based on user setting (scaling mode: Manual) or from incoming AFD (scaling mode: AFD or AFD with default).
WSS is generated from AFD output.
Figure A-24. Video rescaling and WSS generation
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
371
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Decoder Specifications
Audio Processing Table A-35. MPEG Decoder board, Audio Processing
Parameter Output
Description
Capabilities
Decoding formats
A Video channel decodes: Dual channels MPEG board (audio output = SDI): Stereo (2.0) components: Up to 8 or Surround (5.1) components: Up to 2 or Mixed stereo (2.0) and surround (5.1) components: Up to 2 (2.0) and 2 (5.1)
Single channel MPEG board): Stereo (2.0) components: to SDI (up to 8) or AES (up to 4) or Analog (up to 2) or Surround (5.1) components: to SDI (up to 2) or AES (up to 1) or Mixed stereo (2.0) and surround (5.1) components: to SDI (up to 2 (2.0) and 2 (5.1)) or AES (up to 1 (2.0) and 1 (5.1)).
MPEG-1 Layer II AAC-LC* HE-AAC / HE-AAC v2 (2.0, 5.1 (option)) Dolby® Digital (AC3) (2.0, 5.1) (option) Uncompressed (SMPTE 302M-2002) Audio Pass-thru MPEG-1 Layer II (1.0, 2.0) AAC (2.0, 5.1) Dolby E Dolby® Digital (AC3) (2.0, 5.1) Audio Pass-thru are compliant with SMPTE 337M-2008.
Miscellaneous features
372
Dual channels MPEG board: Audio embedded in accordance with SMPTE 272M is inserted in the SDI signal. Single channel MPEG board: Audio embedded in accordance with SMPTE 272M is inserted in the SDI signal or available as analogue or digital audio on Audio connector.
Audio Delay can be set from -80 to 100 ms (step 1 ms) to adjust lipsync.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Decoder Specifications
VBI/ANC Processing Table A-36. MPEG Decoder board, VBI/ANC Processing
Parameter
Description
VBI/ANC components
If VBI/ANC informations are transported in specific components, 2 VBI/ANC components can be decoded at the same time.
SD VBI
SD VBI processing compliant with ETSI EN 301 775 (transport of Transparent Lines VBI only from CP6000 Encoder to CP6000 Decoder). The following VBI can be enabled / disabled on SDI output: Teletext, Video Program System (VPS), Wide Screen Signaling (WSS), Monochrome Transparent, Full Transparent.
ANC
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
ANCillary processing: Compliant with SMPTE 2038 (transport of ANC from CP6000 Encoder to CP6000 Decoder). Compliant with RDD-11 (transport of HD SDI Ancillary Data in an MPEG-2 Transport Stream). Closed Caption EIA-608B & EIA-708B, Ancillary Time Code (ATC_VITC) and Active Format Description (AFD SMPTE-2016-2) are extracted from the Video Stream and inserted in the SDI output. HD Teletext (OP47): HD Teletext (Standard SMPTE RDD-8, Transport EN 301775) ancillary data PID is decoded to deliver the dedicated DID (143h) and SDID (102h) in the SDI output stream. The following ANC can be enabled / disabled on SDI output: SD ANC Closed Caption (EIA 708-B), Time code (ATC), Active Format Description (AFD), Ancillary Transparent (SMPTE-2038). HD ANC Closed Caption (EIA 708-B), Time code (ATC), Active Format Description (AFD), Ancillary Transparent (SMPTE-2038), Ancillary Transparent (RDD-11), HD Teletext (OP-47).
373
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Decoder Specifications
VBI/ANC Processing in Video Rescaling mode Table A-37. MPEG Decoder board, VBI/ANC Processing in Video Rescaling mode
VIDEO IN / VIDEO OUT SD / SD
HD / SD
SD / HD
HD / HD
Yes (VBI teletext)
N/A
To ANC teletext OP-47
N/A
Video, Program System (VPS)
Yes
N/A
N/A
N/A
Wide Screen Signaling (WSS)
Yes
Created from AFD
N/A
N/A
Monochrome transparent
Yes
N/A
N/A
N/A
Full transparent
Yes
N/A
N/A
N/A
Closed caption EIA 608 (Line 21)
No
N/A
N/A
N/A
Video Index
No
N/A
N/A
N/A
Closed caption EIA 708
Yes
N/A
Yes
N/A
Time Code (ATC)
Yes
N/A
Yes
N/A
Active Format Description (AFD)
Yes
N/A
Yes / Refer to Table A-34 on page 369
N/A
Transparent SMPTE-2038
Yes
N/A
N/A
N/A
Closed caption EIA 708
N/A
Yes
N/A
Yes
Time Code (ATC)
N/A
Yes
N/A
Yes
Active Format Description (AFD)
N/A
Yes / Refer to Table A-34 on page 369
N/A
Yes
Transparent SMPTE-2038
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Transparent RDD-11
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
HD teletext (OP47)
N/A
To VBI teletexta
N/A
Yes (ANC Teletext OP47)
SD VBI Teletext
SD Ancillary
HD Ancillary
a Only
374
OP47 subtitling distribution packet (SDP) data is processed to deliver a VBI Teletext.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Decoder Specifications
TS Redundancy If the nominal TS is missing in an MPEG Decoder, it will be replaced by a backup TS. TS inputs can be from ASI or (and) Ethernet input(s). Redundant mode can be selected from the following:
Force nominal TS: The selected TS is always the nominal TS.
Auto Switchback on nominal faultless: When no TS Stream is received on the nominal input, the input automatically switches to the backup input after a time which can be set from 0 to 30s. When the TS stream is received on the nominal input, the system automatically switches to this nominal input after a time which can be set from 0 to 30s.
Auto Switchback on redundant fault: When no TS stream is received on the nominal input, the input automatically switches to the backup input after a time which can be set from 0 to 30s. The system stays on the backup input until a redundant fault occurs. When a redundant fault occurs, the input automatically switches to the nominal input after a time which can be set from 0 to 30s.
Force backup TS: The selected TS is always the backup TS.
Figure A-25. TS redundancy, examples
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
375
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Decoder Specifications
Descrambling Descrambling is an optional feature. 1 option must be installed per MPEG board and enable multiple services descrambling. This feature is used for BISS mode 1 and BISS E descrambling. Refer to section ’Scrambling’ on page 350.
IP to ASI Gateway Refer also to section ’ASI to IP Gateway’ on page 352. IP to ASI gateway is an optional feature. The feature allows an MPEG Transport stream to be exchanged between a CP6000 Encoder and a remote CP6000 Decoder. The Transport Stream is transported transparently and bit-accurately. Two options must be installed (1 per MPEG Encoder board and 1 per MPEG Decoder board). Figure A-26. ASI to IP and IP to ASI Gateway feature. Example: MPEG board without audio interface
ASI to IP Gateway feature refer to section ’ASI to IP Gateway’ on page 352
IP to ASI Gateway feature
Specifications The IP to ASI gateway runs with the video decoder(s) simultaneously. The incoming TS over IP is converted to ASI. Table A-38. IP to ASI gateway specifications
Parameter
Characteristics
Capability
1 IP to ASI gateway per MPEG Decoder board
IP Input
ASI Output
376
IP In: LAN1, LAN2 on the MPEG Decoder board or LAN1, LAN2 on the Manager board (CP6000 only) Includes user configurable input buffer to cope with network jitter ASI Out: IO5 Bitrate: 270 Mbit/s TS bitrate: 213 Mbit/s max MPEG format: SPTS or MPTS
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — MPEG Decoder Specifications
Contribution & Distribution Over UnManaged Networks This feature is optional. Refer to section ’Contribution & Distribution Over Unmanaged Networks’ on page 355.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
377
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications
DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications A single Modulator board per ViBE CP6000 or ViBE CP6100 is allowed. There are 2 types of Modulator:
IF - Band Modulator (from 50 MHz to 180 MHz)
L- Band Modulator (from 950 MHz to 2150 MHz). The L - Band Modulator comes with a Diplexer. Refer to section ’Diplexer Specifications’ on page 385.
Modulators are compliant with DVB-S / DVB-S2 / DVB-S2X / DVB-DSNG standards.
Modulator Block Diagram A Modulator is fitted with:
3 TS inputs:
2 ASI inputs (ASI in1 and ASI in2)
1 TS input from the backplane
1 TS output (ASI OUT) for monitoring
1 RF output (RF)
1 RF output (MON) for monitoring
1 clock reference input (REF IN) for external synchronization
1 clock reference output (REF OUT)
Figure A-27. Modulator block diagram
In the current release (v04.10) the TS (SPTS or MPTS) of only one MPEG board can be linked to the Modulator board via the TS from the backplane input.
378
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications
Interface Specifications Table A-39. Modulator board interface specifications
Connector
Description
LED
Red LED on: The board is powered up and there is at least one board alarm. Red LED off: The board is not powered or there is no board alarm.
RF OUT
MON OUT
REF IN
REF OUT
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Purpose: RF output (band depends on Modulator type) Characteristics: Connector: SMA - 50 Standards: DVB-S / DVB-S2 / DVB-S2X / DVB-DSNG Frequency: - L- Band modulator: 950 MHz to 2150 MHz in 1 Hz steps - IF - Band modulator: 50 MHz to 180 MHz in 1 Hz steps Bandwidth: 0.1 MHz to 72 MHz SNR: > 34 dB @ 0dBm over the entire RF frequency range Spurious rejection > -65 dBc over the entire RF frequency range (except OL rejection -60dBc at 1600 MHz on the L- Band modulator) Power level range: From -30 to + 5 dBm in 0.1 dB steps If needed, the output spectrum can be reversed. Purpose: RF output monitoring Characteristics: Connector: SMA - 50 Bandwidth: 0.1 MHz to 72 MHz Level: -20 dB under the RF OUT power Purpose: Frequency reference input Characteristics: Connector: Female 50BNC Frequency: 10 MHz Level: From -15 to + 15 dBm Purpose: Frequency reference output Characteristics: Connector: Female 50BNC Frequency: 10 MHz Level: 0 dBm ±3 dB
379
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications
Table A-39. Modulator board interface specifications
Connector ASI OUT
Description
ASI IN1
ASI IN2
380
Purpose: Provides the ASI IN1 TS, ASI IN2 TS, TS from the internal MPEG Encoder or TS stream after bitrate adaptation processing for monitoring. Characteristics: Connector: Female 75BNC ASI bitrate: 270 Mbit/s TS bitrate: 200 Mbit/s max TS packet size: 188 bytes Purpose: MPEG compressed input 1 Characteristics: Connector: Female 75BNC ASI bitrate: 270 Mbit/s TS input compliant with EN 50083-9, ETSI TR101 891 v1.1.1 TS bitrate: 200 Mbit/s max MPEG format: SPTS or MPTS TS packet size: 188 or 204 (188 + 16) bytes with automatic detection. In 204 bytes mode, the last 16 bytes are not processed and consequently not modulated Mode: Data burst or Data packet Purpose: MPEG compressed input 2 Characteristics: Refer to ASI IN1 above
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications
Miscellaneous Specifications Table A-40. Miscellaneous specifications
Miscellaneous Specifications Input Stream Management
Two modes are available to configure the modulator input: Manual mode: The Operator selects ASI IN1, ASIN2 or Internal input (TS stream from an MPEG Encoder board). Automatic mode: The Operator selects an input combination from ASI IN1/ASI IN2. If the ASI IN1 and ASI IN2 streams are available, the modulator always takes ASI IN1 as its input stream. When the ASI IN1 stream is interrupted for at least 500ms, the modulator switches to ASI IN2. If it does not find another available stream in the next 1000ms, it generates an alarm. In this mode, in the event of ASI IN1 stream loss the switch to ASI IN2 is automatic but if the ASI IN1 stream is restored, there is no switchback to the ASI IN1 stream.
Input Bitrate Management
This process allows the modulator to build a constant bitrate at the modulation kernel input. The Modulator board offers different possibilities to smooth the bitrate: Null packet adaptation (DVB-S / DVB-S2 / DVB-DSNG): In this operating mode, the unit discards or inserts Null packets to adapt the TS input bitrate to the precise bitrate defined by the selected DVB-S or DVB-S2 mode. PCR (Program Clock Reference) restamping is then executed accordingly. Padding insertion (DVB-S2): This method is described in DVB-S2 standard EN 302 307. It does not modify the incoming MPEG-TS stream (like the previous method) but the useful input stream bitrate must be less than the channel modulation bitrate capability. The process involves completing the DVB-S2 BBFrame (Base Band Frames) with padding. The receiver must remove this padding at the reception end. In this case, the satellite link is transparent for the MPEG-TS because there is no PCR restamping.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
381
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications
Table A-40. Miscellaneous specifications
Miscellaneous Specifications Clock and synchronization
The modulator includes its own clock and synchronization generator. A high stability 10 MHz oscillator provides the internal clock reference to the modulator clock system. An external 10 MHz clock signal can be chosen as a reference clock for the modulator. The modulator clock reference source can be configured as: Internal 10MHz (by default) Locked to the external 10 MHz signal reference The 10MHz input (REF IN connector) signal can be used to synchronize several modulators in parallel when they all broadcast adjacent carriers in the same transponder. However, internal clock stability is usually sufficient without 10MHz input in this situation. If the modulator is synchronized with an external 10 MHz reference and the reference disappears, the modulator uses its own clock during a programmable time from 0 to 1440 min (24 hours). After this time the RF output signal is muted. The 10MHz output (REF OUT connector) signal can be used to control an up-converter if required.
10 MHz Internal oscillator
RF output ON/OFF
Frequency: 10MHz Stability versus temperature: < ± 2.5 ppm (0°C to 50°C) Aging: < ± 0.8 ppm /year, < ± 1.10-8/day Tuning: ± 3 ppm
The Operator can enable or disable RF signal muting according to the following events: Stream input: Stream lost Input packet structure error TS packet format (incorrect TS packet header) Buffer overflow/underflow The default stream detection interval is equal to 1 second. Lost of external 10MHz Reference Synchronization. A time out can be set by the Operator. Manual mute NB: If the Operator disables automatic mute, PRBS TS packets are inserted to reach the bitrate. Un-mute can be configured as direct (abrupt un-muting) or progressive.
Carrier Modulated OFF => Sinus tone generation
382
In this mode, the output signal is replaced by a simple sine signal at the RF frequency. The level of the sinus tone corresponds to the output power (configurable from -30 to +5 dBm). Among other things, this mode allows phase noise measurement without the need for an external amplifier.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications
DVB-S Specifications Table A-41. DVB-S Specifications
Parameter
Description
Standard
EN 300 421
Modulation
Outer/Inner FEC: Reed Solomon/Viterbi Modulation Type and Code rate: QPSK: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 Roll-off value: 0.35
Useful bitrate
Up to 86 Mbit/s depending on the modulation parameters. An internal computer indicates the maximum TS bitrate that can be modulated.
Symbol Rate
0.1 to 53.3 Mbaud
Bandwidth
0.1 to 72 MHz
DVB-DSNG Specifications Table A-42. DVB-DSNG Specifications
Parameter
Description
Standard
EN 300 210
Modulation
Outer/Inner FEC: Reed Solomon/Viterbi Modulation Type and Code rate QPSK: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 8PSK: 2/3, 5/6, 8/9 16QAM: 3/4, 7/8 Roll-off value: 0.35
Useful bitrate
Up to 172 Mbit/s depending on the modulation parameters. An internal computer indicates the maximum TS bitrate that can be modulated.
Symbol Rate
0.1 to 53.3 Mbaud
Bandwidth
0.1 to 72 MHz
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
383
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications
DVB-S2 / DVB-S2X Specifications Table A-43. DVB-S2 Specifications
Parameter
Description
Standards
EN 300 321, EN 302 307
Modulation
Outer/Inner FEC: BCH/LDPC Modulation Type and Code rate QPSK: 1/4, 1/3, 2/5, 1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10 8PSK: 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10 16APSK: 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10 (option) 32APSK: 3/4, 4/5, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10 (option) PL Scrambling codes [0, 264143] Supported DVB modes: CCM: Constant Coding and Modulation DVB-S2 Short frames: 16 200 bits Additional Modulation type and Code rate in DVB-S2X (option): QPSK: 11/45, 4/15, 14/45, 7/15, 8/15, 32/45 8PSK: 7/15, short, 26/45, 32/45 16APSK: 7/15, 8/15, 26/45, 3/5, 32/45 32APSK: 32/45 DVB-S2 Normal frames: 64 800 bits Additional Modulation type and Code rate in DVB-S2X (option): QPSK: 13/45, 9/20, 11/20 8PSK: 5/9-L, 26/45-L, 23/36, 25/36, 13/18 16APSK: 1/2-L, 8/15-L, 5/9-L, 26/45, 3/5, 3/5-L, 28/45, 23/36, 2/3-L, 25/36, 13/18, 7/9, 77/90 32APSK: 2/3-L, 32/45, 11/15, 7/9 64APSK: 32/45-L, 11/15, 7/9, 4/5, 5/6 Roll-off values: 0.05 to 0.35 in 0.01 steps (DVB-S2X compliant) Pilots ON or OFF
Useful bitrate
Up to 200 Mbit/s depending on the modulation parameters. An internal computer indicates the maximum TS bitrate that can be modulated.
Symbol Rate
0.1 to 68 Mbaud
Bandwidth
0.1 to 72 MHz
Carried Id
CID contents: GUI (Global Unique Identifier) GPS coordinates Phone number User data
Signaling A signaling table Editor (SigEditor) can be found on the CD-ROM shipped with the device. This tool provides a user-friendly graphical interface 384
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications
representing the NIT table structure with the possibility of modifying or adding fields and descriptors (selected in a popup menu). Once the table is ready, it can be saved in a file to be downloaded to the CP6000. The NIT table is injected on the TS feeding the Modulator Board. Table A-44. NIT Specifications
Parameter
Description
Standard
Compliant with ISO/IEC 13818-1
Repetition rate
500 ms
NIT Table edition
NIT is edited via the Web Browser Interface
Diplexer Specifications A Diplexer is used to mix the 10 MHz REF OUT and L- Band RF OUT signals generated by the Modulator. The mixed signals are sent in a single cable to the Up converter and Amplifier. Figure A-28. Diplexer and CP6000, use case
Up converter and Amplifier
L Band and 10 MHz in a single cable
RF Out (L Band)
REF Out (10 MHz)
Figure A-29. Diplexer connections
High pass (L Band) Common
Low pass (Ref 10 MHz)
The detailed diplexer specifications are described in the Diplexer_ZDPLX-2150+.pdf document on the CD-ROM shipped with the product.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
385
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Standard Compliance
Standard Compliance Table A-45. Standard compliance
Standards
Title TV standards
386
ANSI/SMPTE 125M -1995 3
Component Video Signal 4:2:2 - Bit-Parallel Digital Interface
SMPTE 259M-2006
SDTV Digital Signal/Data — Serial Digital Interface
SMPTE 260M-1999
1125/60 High-Definition Production System – Digital Representation and Bit-Parallel Interface
SMPTE 272M
Television - Formatting AES/EBU Audio and Auxiliary Data into Digital Video Ancillary Data Space
SMPTE 274M-2005
1920 x 1080 Image Sample Structure, Digital Representation and Digital Timing Reference Sequences for Multiple Picture Rates
SMPTE 291M-2006
Ancillary Data Packet and Space Formatting
SMPTE 292M-2006
1.5 Gb/s Signal/Data Serial Interface
SMPTE 296M-2001
1280 x 720 Progressive Image Sample Structure – Analog and Digital Representation and Analog Interface
SMPTE 302M-2002
Mapping of AES Data into an MPEG-2 Transport Stream
SMPTE 337M-2008
Format for Non-PCM Audio and Data in an AES3 Serial Digital Audio Interface
SMPTE 424M-2006
3 Gb/s Signal/Data Serial Interface
SMPTE 425M-2008
3 GB/s Signal/Data Serial Interface — Source Image Format Mapping
SMPTE 2010
Vertical Ancillary Data Mapping of ANSI/SCTE 104 Messages
SMPTE 2016-1
Format for Active Format Description and Bar Data
SMPTE 2016-3
Vertical Ancillary Data Mapping of Active Format Description and Bar Data
SMPTE 2022-2
Unidirectional Transport of Constant Bit Rate MPEG-2 Transport Streams on IP Networks
SMPTE 2038M-2008
Carriage of Ancillary Data Packets in an MPEG-2 Transport Stream
SMPTE RDD 11
Carriage of HDSDI Ancillary Data in an MPEG-2 Transport Stream
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Standard Compliance
Table A-45. Standard compliance
Standards
Title
SMPTE RP 168-2002
Definition of Vertical Interval Switching Point for Synchronous Video Switching
SMPTE RP 165-1994
Error Detection Checkwords and Status Flags for Use in Bit-Serial Digital Interfaces for Television
SMPTE RP 178-2004
Serial Digital Interface Checkfield for 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals
SMPTE RP 184-2004
Specification of Jitter in Bit-Serial Digital Systems
SMPTE RP 186
Video Index Information Coding for 525 and 625 Line Television Systems
SMPTE RP 198-1998
Bit-Serial Digital Checkfield for Use in High-Definition Interfaces DVB standards
ETSI EN 301 210
Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB); Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for Digital Satellite News Gathering (DSNG) and other contribution applications by satellite
ETSI EN 302 307
Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB); Second generation framing structure, channel coding and modulation systems for Broadcasting, Interactive Services, News Gathering and other broadband satellite applications (DVB-S2)
ETSI EN 300 421
Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB); Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for 11/12 GHz satellite services Chassis standards
AMC.0 R2.0
Advanced Mezzanine Card Base Specification
PICMG MTCA.0 R1.0
Micro Telecommunications Computing Architecture Base Specification
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
387
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Certifications and Environmental Specifications
Certifications and Environmental Specifications Table A-46. Safety Standards
Category Safety
388
Standard
Designed/tested for compliance with:
2006/95/EEC
European Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/E replacing 73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC.
IEC 60950
“Standard for Safety for Information Technology Equipment - Safety - Part 1: General Requirements”, (IEC 60950-1, Second Edition, 2005, Corrigendum: 01-2007).
EN60950
Safety of Information Technology Equipment, including Electrical Business Equipment, (EN 60950-1, Second Edition, September 2006).
ANSI / UL60950
“Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment Safety - Part 1: General Requirements”, (ANSI/UL 60950-1, Second Edition, Dated March 27, 2007). Certified.
CAN/CSA C22.2, No. 60950
“Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment Safety - Part 1: General Requirements”, (CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60950-1-07. Second Edition). Certified.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10 User Manual — Edition A
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Certifications and Environmental Specifications
Table A-47. EMC Standards
Category EMI
Standard 2004/108/EEC
Designed/tested for compliance with: EMC European Directive 2004/108/EC replacing 89/336/EEC and 93/68/EEC.
EN 55022 standard Electromagnetic compatibility (Europe). Information technology equipment - Radio disturbance characteristics Limits and methods of measurement: EN 61000-3-2: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-2: Limits - Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input current up to and including 16 A per phase). EN 61000-3-3: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-3: Limits - Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in public low-voltage supply systems, for equipment with rated current